JP7081568B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a storage unit for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage unit are guided by a game ball launcher and directed toward a game area according to a player's launch operation. Is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or, for example, a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. To.

In a slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where a game value such as a medal is bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform the staging, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is directed so that a predetermined production period occurs over a plurality of games when a target game , which is a game in which a predetermined number of game values are set, is executed. A predetermined effect control means for controlling the execution means, and
In the situation of the predetermined production period, the production content when a non-target game , which is a game in which a game value smaller than the predetermined number is set as a bet, occurs, is the first non-target game as the non-target game. A non-target correspondence control means that makes a difference between the case where the second non-target game occurs and the case where the second non-target game occurs,
Equipped with
The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically.
The second non-target game is a game that occurs continuously, and is a game that occurs continuously.
The non-target correspondence control means
When the first non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined production period, a means for controlling the effect execution means so that the first non-target corresponding effect is executed, and a means for controlling the effect execution means.
When the second non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the means for controlling the effect execution means so that the second non-target corresponding effect is executed, and the means for controlling the effect execution means.
Equipped with
During the predetermined effect period, the effect execution means displays a moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect.
The first non-targeting effect is an effect in which an image that does not use the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means.
The second non-target compatible effect is characterized in that an image using a still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means. do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform the effect.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A) is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit. (A), (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the dual-purpose display unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bet correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of starting which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of a combination executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of three bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of two bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state and the game section existing in a slot machine. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st section and 2nd section, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of each game state in 2nd section. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st CB combination and 2nd CB combination, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB executed in the main MPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows the state which the game state shifts to a CB state, and how the transition to a CB state is restricted. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the notification related to the winning state of the 1st CB combination and the 2nd CB combination. (A) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium. It is a flowchart which shows the internal notification control processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process at the time of supply start executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-internal middle notification process which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB internal medium notification processing executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd CB internal medium notification processing executed by the production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the storage area of the main side RAM. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear process executed by the main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the partial clear process executed by the main MPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a partial clear process and a complete clear process are executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the first start command is received, and (b) for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the second start command is received. It is an explanatory diagram of. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the combination of symbols which can be stopped in the main line when the result of lottery of a combination is out of order, and (b) the lottery process of a combination. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the combination of symbols which can stop in a main line when the index value = 16 is won in. (A), (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of reels and the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the main line when the result is out of the lottery process of the winning combination, (c). , (D) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the main line when the index value = 16 is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. In (a), when the lottery process of the winning combination is missed in the final game of the transition waiting period, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state is the big bonus, which is the reel stop result. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of being notified by (b), when the lottery process of the winning combination is missed in the final game of the transition waiting period, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state occurs and the pseudo-bonus occurs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the state type is a regular bonus is notified by the stop result of a reel. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the bonus type executed by the main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the 3rd start setting process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect control process which is executed in the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel production processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) reel production. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the transition to a pseudo-bonus state is notified by using the stop result of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous state at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pseudo-bonus executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state at the time of starting a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various table groups provided in production side ROM, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of production side RAM for reading a data table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the base effect for AT state, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the base effect for an additional period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data structure of the data table for AT. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for AT which is executed in the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the production side MPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows how the pointer information to be referred in the data table stored in the 1st control area and the 2nd control area is updated in the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process for a loop executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the loop addition effect processing executed by the effect side MPU. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows how the production progresses when the loop lottery is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display device in the case where the irregular game is executed in the addition period of the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the irregular process which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process of the 2nd control area executed by the staging side MPU. (A) to (e) is a time chart showing how the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped by the execution of the irregular game. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed in the production side MPU. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows the state that the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped by the execution of the irregular game, and how it is stopped. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups provided in the effect side ROM in the second embodiment, and (b) an explanation for explaining various areas of the effect side RAM for reading a data table. It is a figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of a predetermined kind of irregular data table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st kind of irregular medium-sized production, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd kind of irregular medium-sized production. It is a flowchart which shows the irregular process which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the irregular process executed by the staging side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process of the 2nd control area executed by the staging side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state at the start of a game executed by the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various table group provided in the production side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for AT which is executed in the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the irregular process at the time of a precursor which is executed in the production side MPU. (A) to (f) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the effect when an irregular game occurs in the middle of this precursor period or false precursor period.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to the slot machine 10, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotating shaft. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key to the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media (or game values), which are medals or virtual medals, are bet, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state where they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the reels and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is permitted by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12, and when reception is prohibited. The medal ejection port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the main line ML described later. Have. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when a medal inserted in the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided.

On the lower left side of the display window 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at once. A second credit insertion button 48 is provided. In the slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing one virtual medal. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal.

If the first credit insertion button 47 is operated when the number of stored virtual medals is smaller than the difference between the current number of bets and the number of bets that can be bet, the number of bets is the number of the virtual medals. As the number of medals increases, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal.

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of virtual medals stored and stored is one and the current number of bets is "0", the number of bets is "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48, which is pressed when the player operates the button. As a result, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A checkout button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated while the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as actual medals.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting values of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". In order to change within the range of "", a setting key insertion hole 57 is provided in which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers are assigned from "0" to "20" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main control device 70 described later from the display window unit 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol in such a state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 32L), and " "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol There are 7 types (for example, the 5th of the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized via the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with a predetermined number or more of game media bet, and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of granting the game medium is obtained. , The benefit of replaying, or the transition of the gaming state is granted.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are combined. Subline SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination prizes for which the game medium is given include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the seventh supplementary prize, and the eighth. There are supplementary prizes, 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prizes, 2nd bell prizes, 1st watermelon prizes, 2nd watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol in the main line ML. It will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the second supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the third supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the fourth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the fifth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the sixth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol, the 7th supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the 8th supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the 9th supplementary prize is won. Will be. In the case of any of the 1st supplementary prize to the 9th supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell is won. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell is won. Will be. In the case of either the first bell prize or the second bell prize, the number of game media to be granted is "15".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon prize is won. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second watermelon wins. Will be. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is awarded, the number of game media to be granted is "5". When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M or the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

There are a normal replay prize, a first chance replay prize, and a second chance replay prize as prizes to which the privilege of the replay that enables the game of the next game to be played without betting the game medium is given. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the main line When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the ML, on the main line ML. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, or on the main line ML, the left reel When the stop symbol of 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, a normal replay prize is won. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay It will be a prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay It will be a prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, the privilege of replay that enables the next game to be played while eliminating the need for betting on the game medium is granted. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the bet of the game medium is not required, and the game medium of "3" is bet in the next game. It becomes possible to start the game. In addition, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "2" is bet, the game of the next game is started with the game medium of "2" bet while eliminating the need for betting of the game medium. It becomes possible to do.

There are a first CB prize and a second CB prize as a state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the first CB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, the second It will be a 2CB prize. When the first CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first CB state ST2, and when the second CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 22).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped in the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning winnings regardless of whether or not there is a winning combination. For example, even if "1" is not set in the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML, the game medium becomes the player. Granted. On the other hand, the replay prize is established on condition that the corresponding role is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, in the non-CB state, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R until a specified time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control is performed on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the reel control similar to that in the normal game is performed, but the reel control is not performed on the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control is performed so that only one symbol can be slid after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control for stopping the left reel 32L until a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated is performed.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control that slides only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the maximum reel corresponding to the first operated stop button is 1. Control may be performed to slip only up to a symbol, or reel control may be performed to slip only a maximum of one symbol only for a predetermined reel. Furthermore, the stop buttons operated in a certain order, such as reel control that slides only up to one symbol for the reel corresponding to the second operated stop button or the last operated stop button. Reel control may be performed in which the reel corresponding to the above is slipped by a maximum of one symbol.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is prioritized, and if the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. In addition, the first bell winning can be established even if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is not won.

Both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states that do not increase the gaming medium owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game media owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state that reduces the number of. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality and is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game on the display surface. That is, the image display device 63 executes the display effect.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display unit 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R, and is a target for a small winning combination. When the number of game media is displayed and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified content is performed, and further, the management result of the game history is notified. A combined display unit 66 for displaying the reels and a section display unit 67 for displaying the game section corresponding to the second section are provided. The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

FIG. 7A is a front view of the common display area 68 provided with the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, a section display unit including a combined display unit 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction and a light emitting unit is provided. 67 and are aggregated.

When any of the small winning combination prizes (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize or cherry prize) corresponding to the grant of the game medium are established. At the end of the game in which the small winning combination is established, the number of game media granted corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, when any of the 1st to 9th supplementary prizes is established in the non-CB state, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side. By displaying it, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been added. When either the 1st bell prize or the 2nd bell prize is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By displaying it, it is notified that the game medium of "15" has been added. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is established in the non-CB state, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side. By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "5" has been added. Further, when the cherry prize is established in the non-CB state, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "2" is displayed. Is notified that has been given.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media given by winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described in detail later. Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side. As a result, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been added.

On the other hand, even if a prize such as one of the replay prizes and one of the CB prizes that is not given a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the prize is not performed on the combined display unit 66, and in this case, each The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a hidden state. The display of the number of game media granted on the combined display unit 66 ends when the game medium is bet to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the bet timing. The vessels 66a and 66b are hidden.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63. The stop order is 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the stop order is the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is. The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. 2 stops are the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest. There is an arbitrary stop order and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is the first when a combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data is won in the combination lottery process in the non-CB state. If you win a role that includes 2 bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data, if you win a role that includes normal replay winning data, or if you do not win any of the winning roles Can be executed. Specifically, when a winning combination including the 1st bell winning data and any of the 1st to 6th supplementary winning data is won, the reel 32L is in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, 32R is stopped when the 1st bell prize is established, and when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination this time, the 1st to 6th supplementary prizes are won. Either can be true. If the 1st bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as already explained, and if any of the 1st to 6th supplementary prizes is established, "1" is already explained. The game medium of is given to the player.

If a winning combination that includes the 2nd bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th supplementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be placed in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels are stopped, the 2nd bell prize is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination this time, one of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is established. obtain. If the 2nd bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given to the player as already explained, and if any of the 7th to 9th supplementary prizes is established, "1" as already explained. The game medium of is given to the player.

When the winning combination including the normal replay winning data is won, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the predetermined stop order among the above stop orders, the "red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" on the predetermined sublines SL1 to SL4. The combination of the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a specific stop order among the above stop orders, the "Red 7" symbol is displayed on the main line ML. , "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination are stopped and displayed. If the winning combination is not won, the "red 7" symbol is displayed on the predetermined sublines SL1 to SL4 when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the predetermined stop order among the above stop orders. The combination of the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a specific stop order among the above stop orders, the "Red 7" symbol is displayed on the main line ML. , "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol combination are stopped and displayed.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the combined display unit 66 is maintained in a hidden state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. Is displayed according to the stop order of the notification target. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to correspond one-to-one with the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the combined display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. May be good.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the combined display unit 66. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media to be added or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

8 (a) and 8 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order in the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. Unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, images corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed. Specifically, the left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 8A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8B, the reel is displayed. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to each unit display image G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display unit 66 displays a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the combined display unit 66 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are supported. The display is started after the winning combination lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. Is terminated when occurs.

The combined display unit 66 is arranged on the center side in the common display area 68, while the section display unit 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 22). The second section SC2 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to establish a winning prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order of, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is 1 or more. It is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (specifically, pseudo-bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5) that can be possible can be started, and the advantageous gaming state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state is not started and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

When the section display unit 67 wins a winning combination whose winning target is different according to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a winning combination whose winning is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the advantageous gaming state where the expected value of the game medium is 1 or more by being notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning prize that is advantageous to the player, the lighting state is displayed. Become. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, corresponds to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. When the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state when shifting to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is turned off when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 is started in the second section SC2. It will be lit.

When the section display unit 67 becomes lit, the lit state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends, and when the second section SC2 ends and the process shifts to the first section SC1, the section display unit 67 is turned off. Become. Therefore, even if the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 may be maintained, but in this case, the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends. Even so, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state, and when the second section SC2 ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off.

As described above, the section display unit 67 is provided collectively in the common display area 68 in a configuration in which the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 is terminated once the section display unit 67 is turned on in the second section SC2. The combined display unit 66 is turned on when the game medium is added and turned off at the start of the next game, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. When it is played, it is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the section display unit 67 in the common display area 68 is in the situation of the second section SC2. It is possible to positively generate a situation in which the light is on, and it is easy for the manager of the game hall to confirm the section display unit 67.

In the second section SC2, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the section display unit 67 is maintained, in the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may be configured to perform blinking display at a predetermined cycle. Further, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that raises the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. The MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is transparently formed so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible to visually check the MPU 72 through the facing wall portion 82.

The substrate box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are for preventing the separation of the case bodies and leaving a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A connecting portion 83 is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substrate box 81 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion is subsequently separated. By putting 83 in the bonded state, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 83. Become. Further, in the substrate box 81, a sealing seal 84 is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side. When the seal seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the seal seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged on the front door 12 so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63. The staging control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. The staging control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a first random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates the first random number within a predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a second random number based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit. A second random number circuit 76 that is sequentially updated within a predetermined numerical range and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 has an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal insertion Insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51. , The payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor for detecting the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, the setting key detection sensor for detecting that the setting key is inserted in the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. Various sensors are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

A reel unit 31, a selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a combined display unit 66, a section display unit 67, an effect control device 90, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the selector 52 is guided to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detecting the medal. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permitted state and the acceptance prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are paid out. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the combined display unit 66 so that when the game medium is given, the number of the game media to be given is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section SC2 is performed when the notification start trigger occurs in the case of the second section SC2. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 90 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. In that case, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the staging control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the execution target of the relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed by the staging control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is the execution target of the relatively simple display control. The direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. This makes it possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and the power failure monitoring circuit is applied from an external power source to the power supply unit. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 92 is mounted on the staging control board 91. The MPU 92 is a memory for temporarily storing various control programs executed by the MPU 92, a ROM 93 storing fixed value data, and various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. May be good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 performs various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70. To be done.

Although not shown, the staging control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and at the same time, reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sets the VDP as a drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs the image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, so that the image display device 63 displays the image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as a main MPU 72, a main ROM 73, and a main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the staging control device 90 are referred to as the staging side, respectively. It is referred to as MPU 92, directing side ROM 93 and directing side RAM 94.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on in a state where the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the setting key is turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on while the setting key is turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO). After executing the partial clear process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), the set value update process is executed after the all clear process is executed (step S105) (step S106). In the partial clearing process (step S104), a part of the area of the main RAM 74 is initialized, and in the all clearing process (step S105), the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized. The contents of the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) will be described later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the set value update process is executed, either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed before that, so that the credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the set value of "1" is performed on the unit 65. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update process, and the set value update process ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is normal.

If an affirmative judgment is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, so that the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the staging side MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S114).

Information indicating whether or not any of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data, which will be described later, is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the power recovery command. That is, in step S113, it is specified whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored. The power recovery command with the setting is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. Further, in step S113, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored. The power recovery command with the setting is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. A power recovery command with the information indicating that is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" so that all the actuators connected to the output ports are connected. Is set to the OFF state (step S116), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 milliseconds, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, a loop lottery process for performing a lottery corresponding to the AT state ST5 is executed. In step S207, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In step S208, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and the sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting an illegality with respect to the hopper device 53. As described above, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting medals paid out from the payout device. .. When it becomes necessary to pay out medals, the medals are paid out by driving and controlling the payout device, and the paid out medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. Then, when the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of medals to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, the number of medals to be actually paid out is increased by inserting a fraudulent jig from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal ejection port 58 so that the payout detection sensor cannot detect the medal by the fraudulent jig. It is assumed that cheating will cause more medals to be paid out than medals. In this slot machine 10, although the payout device is driven and controlled so as to pay out medals, if the payout detection sensor does not detect the medal for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the payout device is driven as an abnormal payout. Although the control will be stopped, if the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the above-mentioned predetermined period. When a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality release operation on the key cylinder 14 after replenishing the medals.

In response to the above fraudulent activity, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving from the medal ejection port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the path from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S208, when each object detection sensor is in the detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds). However, if each object detection sensor is in the detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the above abnormality detection period, an intrusion abnormality is detected. Judge. When it is determined that the intrusion abnormality is determined, "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92. As a result, the effect side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of the operating power of the slot machine 10, but when "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74 after the supply of the operating power is restarted. Since the intrusion abnormality command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 again, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. In order to release the state in which "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag, it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

In step S209, a timer subtraction process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S210, a counter process is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S211th, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 92 is performed. In step S212, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S213, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72.

In step S214, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display unit 66 is executed. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the above ratio performed for each set value. After that, in step S215, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, the start waiting process is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay provided in the main RAM 74 (step S401). The bet set flag at the time of replay specifies whether or not the same number of bets as the previous bet has already been set in the main MPU 72 when any of the replay prizes has been established in the previous game. It is a flag to do. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is provided on the condition that one of the replay winnings is established in the previous game (step S402: YES) (FIG. 9). (See), the value of the bet number history counter also provided in the main RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. It is a counter of. After that, "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay (step S404).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S401, a negative determination is made in step S402, or the process of step S404 is executed, the bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a bet handling process.

When the current game state is not the second CB state ST3 (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets that is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in this game (step S502). When the current game state is the second CB state ST3 (step S501: YES), "2" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in this game (step S503). That is, in the slot machine 10, the upper limit of bets is set to "2" when the second CB state is ST3, and the upper limit of bets is set to "3" when the second CB state is not ST3.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, the stored virtual medals are stored on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO). It is determined whether or not one or more cards have been used and a valid betting operation has been performed (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored and stored. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, and thus it is determined whether or not the number of stored virtual medals is 1 or more. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed, and when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set. It is determined that a valid betting operation has been performed on condition that the value is 1 or less.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or more than the bet upper limit number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set. The value for the number of virtual medals used at the time of setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the maximum number of bets. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a. Further, in the bet number setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S504, a negative judgment is made in step S505, or the process of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a indicates that a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 45. It is determined whether or not one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 1 (step S509). ), If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage storage number (specifically, "50"). (Step S511: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is not detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a and is ejected to the medal tray 59.

When a negative determination is made in step S507, a negative determination is made in step S511, or the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 (step S513). ). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 (step S513: YES), the bet number setting counter 74a is provided in the main RAM 74 on condition that the value is “3” (step S514: YES). “1” is set in the bet set flag at the time of acceptance (step S515). On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 (step S513: NO), the bet has been set at the time of acceptance, provided that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES). Set the flag to "1" (step S515).

The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media that can start one game is bet. When the game state is the first CB state ST2, one game cannot be started in a situation where the game medium of "3" is not bet, and the game medium of "3" is bet. It is possible to start one game. Further, when the game state is not the first CB state ST2, one game cannot be started in a situation where two or more game media are not bet, and two or more game media are bet. It is possible to start one game.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). When the settlement button 51 is operated (step S406: YES), after executing the settlement process (step S407), the bet set flag at the time of receiving the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process of step S407, when "1" is not set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74, the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals of the above can be ejected to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared by "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared by "0". On the other hand, when "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74, the hopper device 53 is set so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is ejected to the medal tray 59. Drive control. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting process in step S302, "1" is set for either the bet set flag at the time of replay or the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74. Is set or not (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is not detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a and is ejected to the medal tray 59.

After that, in step S306, the setting process at the start for making various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, the winning combination lottery processing for performing the winning combination in this game is executed. , Step S308 executes a reel control process for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in an manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of this combination.

After that, the medium addition process is executed (step S309). In the medium granting process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. Further, in the medium granting process, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media in the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet is made on the game medium.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S311). After that, the reception permission process is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the bet set flag at the time of replay and the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603), and the main side RAM 74 When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S602: YES), the second bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for the directing MPU 92 to recognize that the bet number of the game started this time is "3", and the second bet number command is the bet number of the game started this time is "3". This is a command for the production side MPU 92 to recognize that it is "2".

When the process of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is set in the bet number history counter of the main RAM 74 (step S605). The value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the lottery process of the winning combination executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a first random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the first random number at that time is latched from the first random number circuit 75. The first random number circuit 75 generates the first random number of "0" to "65535", and the main MPU 72 uses the value latched in the first random number circuit 75 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. It is stored in the RAM 74. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire the first random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The first random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the first random number, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and performing an ON operation, a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to set which set value corresponds to the winning probability to execute the winning combination lottery process. If the set value is "n + 1" rather than "n", the winning probability is more advantageous for the player. Specifically, since the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the set value is "n" than when it is "n", it is more advantageous for the player to have the set value "n + 1" than "n". .. Further, even if the set values are set at the same stage, the case where the number of bet game media is "3" is more advantageous for the player than the case where the number is "2". Further, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as gaming states. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to a combination of the current set value, the current number of bets, and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described by taking the case where the set value is "3" as an example. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a winning combination lottery table at the time of three bets selected when the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 18 is selected when the number of bets is “2”. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination lottery table at the time of two bets. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, an index value IV is set in the winning combination lottery table regardless of whether the bet is three or two. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the first random number circuit 75. In addition, the number of index values IV is the same at the time of 3-card bet and at the time of 2-card bet, and the type of winning data set for each index value IV is 3-card bet except for index value IV = 17. It is the same at the time and when betting two cards.

Specifically, the index value IV = 1 to 6 is set with the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the second stop command is generated). When the reel) is the middle reel 32M and the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is certain regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, the first supplementary prize may be established. When winning with an index value IV = 2, each stop button 42 to 44 is when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the fourth supplementary prize can be established. When winning with an index value IV = 3, each stop button 42 to 44 is when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize can be established. When winning with an index value IV = 4, each stop button 42 to 44 is when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the sixth supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 5, each stop button 42 to 44 is when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and the second supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of, and in other cases, the fifth supplementary prize can be established.

In this slot machine 10, as described above, in the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is applied to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Will be done. In other words, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R until a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is configured in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, it may happen that the constituent symbols do not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). Say). The first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the first to ninth supplementary prizes and the first are not missed. The watermelon winning, the second watermelon winning, the cherry winning, the first CB winning, and the second CB winning are winning modes in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

The index value IV = 7 to 9 is set with the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth supplementary winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The second bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh supplementary winning can be established. When winning with an index value IV = 8, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44 are performed. The 2nd bell prize can be surely established regardless of the timing, and the 9th supplementary prize can be established in other cases. When winning with an index value IV = 9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the reels 32M, 32R to be stopped third, and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44. The second bell prize can be surely established regardless of the timing, and the eighth supplementary prize can be established in other cases.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV = 10 is set with the first bell winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 19, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. ..

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 11. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set at the index value IV = 12. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 13. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 19, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 14. When winning with an index value IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 15. When winning with an index value IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the normal replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 16. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 19, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

For the index value IV = 17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 17 in the case of a winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting, and in FIG. 18 in the case of a winning combination lottery table at the time of 2-card betting. As shown, only the second CB winning data is set. That is, the first CB winning data is data set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". It can be established. Further, the second CB winning data is data set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". It can be established. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", as shown in FIG. 19, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first CB prize will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "2", as shown in FIG. 19, the second CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning is established, and the game after the winning game is used. Will not be carried over. On the other hand, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are the clear processing of the main RAM 74 (the first CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or all cleared (step S105), the second CB winning data. (Step S105)), the data is retained until the corresponding prize is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game. In this case, in the game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target.

That is, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning is not established. If the game is subsequently played in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target, and then the number of bets is increased. Even if the game is played in the situation of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. Further, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning is not established. If the game is subsequently played in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target, and then the number of bets is increased. Even if the game is played in the situation of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. As a result, even though either the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is already stored and retained, either the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is not newly stored. It becomes possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the winning combination lottery table at the time of three-card bet in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the index value IV = 3. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 4, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 are each about 1 /. It is 21.8. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 7, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9 are about 1/21.8, respectively. be. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 is about 1 / 9.4. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11 is about 1/164. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12 is about 1/146. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 13 is about 1/423. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 is about 1/328. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 15 is about 1/164. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 is about 1 / 7.3. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 3.3.

On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery table at the time of two-card betting in FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is higher than the case where the winning combination lottery table at the time of three-card betting is selected. It has a low probability. Specifically, when the winning combination lottery table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16 is the probability when the winning combination lottery table for three bets is selected. The probability is less than 2/3 of. As a result, the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet is accompanied by the addition of the game medium than the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "2" is bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a small role winning and a replay winning in which a replay is given.

However, when the winning combination lottery table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 2.2. On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery table at the time of three-card bet is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "2" is bet is executed in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet. It is possible to increase the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the game to be played.

In addition to the winning combination lottery table at the time of 3-card betting and the winning combination lottery table at the time of 2-card betting, the main ROM 73 has a lottery process for each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (FIG. 16). ) Is stored in the CB lottery table. Only one index value IV is set in the CB lottery table, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning at the index value IV is 3/10, and when the index value IV is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Normal replay prizes are established regardless of the order. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell winning can be established.

Here, the index values IV other than the index values IV = 12 and 15 have the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". This applies to both the case where the number of bets on the game medium is "3" and the case where the number of bets is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the index values IV = 12 and 15 differ between the set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning at an index value IV = 12 is the lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the winning probability is, and the case where the setting value is "6" is the highest. high. Further, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 15 is the lowest when the setting value is "1", the winning probability is higher when the setting value is larger, and the highest when the setting value is "6". This makes it possible to provide a difference in advantage between the set values of "1" to "6".

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702 and setting the index value IV to "1" (step S703), the determination value used when determining the winning or failing of the winning combination. DV is set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the first random number acquired in step S701 is set as the current determination value DV, and the value of this first random number corresponds to the index value IV = 1, which is the current index value IV. The point value PV to be added is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate (step S705). In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S706).

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S704 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S704, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of whether or not the previous combination is successful to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S705, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S708, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the first stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S710, the first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, and the stop order notification control process is executed in step S712. The processing contents of steps S710 to S712 will be described in detail later.

After that, the game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission process, if any of the winning roles is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this time, the information corresponding to the winning combination and the information corresponding to the current gaming state. And the information corresponding to the processing results of step S710 and step S711 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. ..

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps various information in the current game from the game start command. Then, the production side MPU 92 determines the content of the production in an manner corresponding to the various information grasped. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed. Take control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not this game is the start game (that is, the first game) of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is a game state advantageous to the player (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S802). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game, and if not. Wait until the weight time elapses. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Notify the players and the like.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the reel effect processing is executed (step S803). The details of the reel effect processing will be described later, but if the conditions for executing the reel effect are satisfied, the effect using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. In the reel effect processing, when the reel effect is generated, the rotation start process similar to step S802 is executed after the reel effect is completed. Further, in the reel effect processing, if the condition for executing the reel effect is not satisfied, the rotation start process similar to that in step S802 is executed without generating the reel effect.

When the process of step S802 or step S803 is executed, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S804). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process of step S804 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, whether or not the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (Step S805). If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S804, and the process of step S804 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S806). The stop command command is a command for causing the staging side MPU 92 to recognize which stop button 42 to 44 is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is transmitted, the stop control process shown in steps S807 to S813 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S807). Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S808).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are slid for one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding three symbols, and four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the machine is slid and then stopped. Therefore, in step S808, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S809). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S810), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are equal. A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (step S811). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S812). If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S813), and the process returns to step S804.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slip number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S709 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and the stop information first setting process executed in step S813 of the reel control process (FIG. 20) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop rolls of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

If it is determined in step S812 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S814. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination process is executed as the winning combination is established. In the prize-corresponding process, if the prize is a small winning combination, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that the game medium can be assigned in the medium granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (FIG. 13).

After executing the winning determination process, the winning result command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S815). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game in the corresponding process at the end of the game. It will be executed after it is done.

First, the first CB state ST2 executes a CB process for performing transition control and progress control of the second CB state ST3 (step S901). The CB process will be described in detail later. After that, on condition that it is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S903). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, the normal processing is executed (step S904), and when the gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus processing is executed (step S905). ), When the game state is the AT state ST5, the AT process is executed (step S906), and when the game state is the end preparation state ST6, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S907). .. Further, the second control process (step S907) of the game section is also executed when any of the normal process of step S904, the pseudo bonus process of step S905, and the AT process of step S906 is executed. Further, the second control process (step S907) of the game section is also executed in any of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. The processing contents of steps S904 to S907 will be described in detail later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a positive determination is made in step S902 for normal processing in step S904, pseudo-bonus processing in step S905, and AT in step S906. Do not execute the process. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for advancing the normal game state ST1, the process for advancing the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the process for advancing the AT state ST5 are executed. Not done. On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control process of the gaming section in step S907 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

<About the game state and game section>
Next, the gaming state and the gaming section will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section existing in the slot machine 10.

In the slot machine 10, there are a normal gaming state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6 as gaming states. These gaming states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player stays by executing the partial clear process (step S104) or the complete clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74. Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, or when the end preparation state ST6 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game (“expected number of game media granted in one game” to “game bet in one game” regardless of whether the bet is three or two. The value obtained by subtracting the "number of media") is less than 1. Further, in the normal game state ST1, neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is the main side. There is an internal state stored in the RAM 74.

The first CB state ST2 is a gaming state that shifts when the first CB winning is established in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", while one game is executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". I can't. Further, the second CB state ST3 is a gaming state that shifts to the case where the second CB winning is established in the situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", while the upper limit of bets is set to "2", so that the game medium of "3" is bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states that do not increase the gaming medium owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game media owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state that reduces the number of. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a gaming state in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied in the normal gaming state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. If the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later and the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is not satisfied, the process shifts to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later is satisfied, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There is a memorized internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the situation of pseudo-bonus state ST4, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is 1 or more in the case of three-card bet, and in the situation of pseudo-bonus state ST4, in the case of two-card bet, the expected value of the game medium in one game The expected net increase is less than 1.

The AT state ST5 is a gaming state in which the transition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later and the second section SC2 ends when the transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed, the process shifts to the end preparation state ST6. If the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later and the second section SC2 does not end at the time of transition to the normal game state ST1, the end preparation state ST6 does not occur. It shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later is satisfied, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". In the AT state ST5, neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There is an internal state that is being done.

In the AT state ST5, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Further, in the AT state ST5, when any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established, the game medium of "15" is given. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game in the AT state ST5. In the situation of AT state ST5, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is 1 or more in the case of three bets, and in the situation of AT state ST5, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is expected in the case of two bets. The value is less than 1.

The end preparation state ST6 is a gaming state that shifts when the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later and without satisfying the transition condition to the AT state ST5. Further, the end preparation state ST6 is a case where the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and the second section SC2 ends at the subsequent transition to the normal gaming state ST1. It is a game state that shifts to the case.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game is executed. When the end preparation state ST6 ends, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether the bet is 3 or 2 cards. Further, in the end preparation state ST6, neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is the main side. There is an internal state stored in the RAM 74.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a game section is set separately from these game states ST1 to ST6. The first section SC1 and the second section SC2 are set as the game section. That is, in this slot machine 10, as factors that determine the game situation, the number of bets on the game media of "2" and "3", the set values of "1" to "6", and various game states ST1 to ST6 are used. There are game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables a player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination whose winning target is different is won according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order of, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is 1 or more. It is a section in which the advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5) that can be possible is not started, and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set and the first section SC1 is set. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, it also becomes the first section SC1. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed as described above, the first section SC1 is set and the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed. It also becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 shifts from the first section SC1 when a shift to the second section SC2 occurs based on the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the number of bets is "2" in the first section SC1. Even if a certain game is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, the player who expects the transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute the game in which the bet number is "3" instead of executing the game in which the bet number is "2". There is.

In the first section SC1, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is surely less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is less than 1. It may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player is expected to shift to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1.

The first section SC1 ends when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 may end when the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5 or the end preparation state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 is completed, the process shifts to the first section SC1. Further, as a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1 occurs is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), And by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1, the limited total net increase in the number of game media becomes the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set that one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (in the situation where the game medium is not granted," 0. A value obtained by subtracting "the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game is not executed)" is specified. In the case of a difference number of sheets, it is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value.

That is, when the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. Move to 1 section SC1. Further, when the second section SC2 is continued and the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 is reached. Transition. Then, when any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5. At the same time, the second section SC2 is terminated, and the game shifts to the situation where the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 22, the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 may stay in any of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each gaming state ST1 to ST6 in the second section SC2. As described above, in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6, the game is executed in any of the situations where the bet number of the game medium is "3" and "2". Is possible. The first CB state ST2 can execute the game only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the second CB state ST3 plays the game only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". It is possible to do it.

In the case of the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, regardless of whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. The expected net increase in game media is less than one. In this case, as will be described later, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game. The transition lottery process is executed in the game in which the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Further, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the value of the release game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and after the deduction of 1 is performed. When the value of the release game number counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is confirmed, but the subtraction of the release game number counter 74e is in the game where the bet number is "3". Is executed, but not in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute the game having the bet number "3" than to execute the game having the bet number "2". It is advantageous for the player.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, whereas the game in which the number of bets is "2" is When executed, the expected net increase in the gaming medium is less than one. Therefore, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, it is better for the player to execute the game having the bet number "3" than to execute the game having the bet number "2". It is advantageous. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, as will be described later, the transition lottery process to the AT state ST5 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game. It is executed in the game of "3", but not in the game of "2". Therefore, from this point as well, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, it is better to execute the game with the bet number "3" than to execute the game with the bet number "2". It is advantageous for the person.

In the AT state ST5, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, whereas the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. If so, the expected net increase in the gaming medium is less than one. Therefore, in the AT state ST5, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game having the bet number "3" than to execute the game having the bet number "2". Is. In the AT state ST5, as will be described later, an additional lottery for determining whether or not to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game. Processing and transition lottery processing to an additional period in which the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is likely to increase can be executed, but these additional lottery processing and transition lottery processing are performed in a game in which the number of bets is "3". Is executed, but not in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, from this point as well, it is better to execute the game having the bet number "3" in the AT state ST5 than to execute the game having the bet number "2". It is advantageous for.

As described above, even if it is advantageous to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2. , The number of game media granted in the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is the number of the game media in the second section SC2. In addition to being added as a limited total net increase, the second section SC2 is continued for the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2. It will be added as the total number of games played. That is, although the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player, the game is the second. It will contribute to the side that satisfies the ending condition of the section SC2. From this point as well, in the case of any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3". It is more advantageous for the player than allowing the game of number "2" to be executed.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be established and the second CB winning can be established as in the first section SC1. If the first CB prize is established in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2 is set in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and the first CB state ST2 are completed. To. Further, when the second CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3 is set in the second section SC2, and when the second CB state ST3 is set and the second section SC2 is completed even after the second CB state ST3 is completed. Be maintained. As described above, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are games owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a gaming state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous gaming states for the player. On the other hand, the games executed in any of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by the continuation of the second section SC2. That is, although the game executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the side that establishes the ending condition of the second section SC2. .. Therefore, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it becomes more disadvantageous for the player.

The end preparation state ST6 is the game medium regardless of whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Although the expected net increase value is less than 1, it is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5. Therefore, the game executed in the end preparation state ST6 does not contribute to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and does not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the game is executed in the end preparation state ST6, it contributes to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and further in the second section SC2. It may be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<About CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described in detail. FIG. 24A shows the first CB combination (that is, the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB combination (that is, the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74). FIG. 24 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the first CB combination can be won in a game in which the number of bets is "3", whereas it cannot be won in a game in which the number of bets is "2". In a game in which the number of bets is "3", there is a probability of winning the first CB combination with a probability of about 1 / 3.3. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In the case of either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in a game in which the number of bets is "2", whereas it cannot be won in a game in which the number of bets is "3". In a game in which the number of bets is "2", there is a probability of winning the second CB combination with a probability of about 1 / 2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In the case of either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the first CB combination, the first CB prize can be established in the game in which the number of bets is "3", while the first CB prize cannot be established in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Therefore, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB winning combination, no index value IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). , The first CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, even if the index value IV in which the so-called omission may occur in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB winning combination, the reel is won. The first CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB winning is established, the first CB state ST2 is set.

As shown in FIG. 24B, in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3", and in the situation where the number of bets is 2 or less, the game can be executed. It is impossible. In the first CB state ST2, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop is performed. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the left stop button 42 If the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not a predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the first bell winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. Further, the normal replay winning may be surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop of each stop button 42 to 44 are stopped. The configuration may be such that the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

When the first bell winning is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is given. As described above, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the game medium of "3" is bet. On the other hand, the number of game media given in the game of the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when the game medium of "30" is given. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate the event that the game medium of "1" is given 30 times in the game executed by betting the game medium of "3". From the start to the end of the first CB state ST2, the game medium owned by the player is reduced by at least 60. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 becomes a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

Further, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay prize may be established and both the normal replay prize and the first bell prize may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. It will be added to the total number of games played.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game in which the number of bets is "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game in which the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB winning combination, the winning combination is not won in any index value IV in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). , The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, even if the index value IV in which the so-called omission may occur in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB winning combination, the reel is won. The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the second CB state ST3 is set.

As shown in FIG. 24B, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the bet number is "2", and the upper limit bet number of the game medium is "2". In the second CB state ST3, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop is performed. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the left stop button 42 If the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not a predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the first bell winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. And, the normal replay winning may be surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop of each stop button 42 to 44 are stopped. The configuration may be such that the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell prize is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is given. As described above, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when the game medium of "2" is bet. On the other hand, the number of game media given in the game of the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when the game medium of "30" is given. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate the event that the game medium of "1" is given 30 times in the game executed by betting the game medium of "2". From the start to the end of the second CB state ST3, the game medium owned by the player is reduced by at least 30. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay prize may be established and both the normal replay prize and the first bell prize may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. It will be added to the total number of games played.

In the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as the game states disadvantageous to the player as described above, the winning state of the second CB combination is obtained by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". By executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" after preventing the second CB winning from being established, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped as a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed and the second CB combination is won, then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed and the second CB combination is executed. The second CB prize is not established even in the winning state of. Further, in the winning state of the second CB combination, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), so that the first CB combination Will not be in the winning state. Then, the first CB prize is not established because the first CB combination is not won, and the gaming state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. Then, by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", the transition to the second section SC2 may occur and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 may occur as described above.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are paid out, more medals than originally supposed to be paid out are paid out by preventing the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 from detecting medals by using a fraudulent jig. It is expected that fraudulent acts will occur. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, and the object detection sensor detects the intrusion of the fraudulent jig. In that case, the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted so as not to be detected by the object detection sensor, the act of illegally paying out many medals using the fraudulent jig is repeated. The intrusion of the illegal jig may be detected by the object detection sensor and the intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudster illegally executes the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 to forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification. Then, it is assumed that the game is played using the illegally obtained medals in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such an illegal act is performed, the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, so that the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. That is, the second CB combination is not in the winning state. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state where the second CB combination is not won, the player can take the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB prize is established, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes the first CB state ST2 which is a game state. This makes it possible to give a disadvantage to a person who commits the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. On the other hand, in the game hall, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" before the start of business and setting the winning state of the second CB role, it becomes a normal player who does not perform the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 24 (a), in a game in which the number of bets is "2", the probability of winning the second CB combination is about 1 / 2.2, whereas the number of bets is "3". The probability of winning the first CB combination is about 1 / 3.3. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. As a result, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a game hall or the like to win the second CB combination, the number of games required until the second CB combination is won is reduced. Is possible. On the other hand, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed before the second CB combination is mistakenly won, the probability of winning the first CB combination is higher than the probability of winning the second CB combination. If it is low, it will be difficult to win the first CB role.

The probability of winning the 2nd CB combination is not limited to a higher probability than the probability of winning the 1st CB combination, and the probability of winning the 1st CB combination is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB combination. The configuration may be high, and the probability of winning the first CB combination and the probability of winning the second CB combination may be the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a CB process executed by the main MPU 72. The CB process is executed in step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21) is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game, the CB processing is also executed in one game, reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is executed after all the rotations of are stopped.

By determining whether or not "1" is set in any of the first CB state flag and the second CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74, the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. (Step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the gaming state is the first CB state ST2 by the main MPU 72, and the second CB state flag is mainly whether or not the gaming state is the second CB state ST3. It is a flag for specifying by the side MPU 72.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the first CB winning is stopped at the main line ML in the situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the first CB winning is established (step S1002: YES), "1" is set in the first CB state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1003), and the first CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, as described above, the processing of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14) is executed, so that the game is executed only in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet. The Rukoto.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning is established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the second CB winning is stopped at the main line ML in the situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the second CB winning is established (step S1006: YES), "1" is set in the second CB state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1007), and the second CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). ). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the second CB state ST3 has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, as described above, the game medium of "2" is bet by executing the processes of step S503, step S508, step S515 and step S516 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14). The game will be executed only in.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in this game (step S1010). When the first bell winning is established (step S1010: YES), the value of the total grant counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1011). The total grant counter is a counter for specifying the total number of gaming media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. In case, "0" is cleared.

When the value of the total grant counter after 1 addition becomes "30", which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CB corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3. Clear the status flag to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, a state in which the gaming state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and a state in which the transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 26. FIG. 26 (a) shows a period in which the game is played in the situation where the game medium of “3” is bet, and FIG. 26 (b) shows the game is played in the situation where the game medium of “2” is bet. 26 (c) shows the period in which the first CB combination is won, FIG. 26 (d) shows the period in which the second CB combination is won, and FIG. 26 (e) shows the period. The period during which the first CB prize or the second CB prize can be established is shown, FIG. 26 (f) shows the period which is either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and FIG. 26 (g) shows the first section. In SC1, the period during which the transition to the second section SC2 is possible is shown, and FIG. 26 (h) shows the period in which the game is digested in the second section SC2.

First, a case where the transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t1, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the gaming section is the first section SC1 and the normal gaming state ST1. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeatedly executed, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 26 (d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Further, in the situation where the second CB combination is won, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (b), and the second CB prize is won as shown in FIG. 26 (e). Is the period during which can be established.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26A, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed. Even if the 2nd CB role is won, if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the 2nd CB prize will not be established, and in the winning state of the 2nd CB role, the 1st CB role will be won. There is nothing to do. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), it is a period during which the CB prize cannot be established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur, but when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the second section is executed. Since a transition to SC2 may occur, the transition to the second section SC2 is possible at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 26 (g).

After that, when the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, the second section SC2 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (h), and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The game will be digested in the second section SC2.

Then, at the timing of t5, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (b). In this case, since the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 26 (e). Further, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game digested in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h). After that, when the second CB prize is established at the timing of t6, the second CB state ST3 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h).

Next, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated from the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started at the timing of t7, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the gaming section is the first section SC1 and the normal gaming state ST1. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur. Therefore, at the timing of the t7, the game to the second section SC2 is performed as shown in FIG. 26 (g). It will be a transitional period. After that, when the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, the second section SC2 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (h), and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The game will be digested in the second section SC2.

After that, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 26 (c). Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (a) in the situation where the first CB combination is won, the first CB is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established. After that, when the first CB prize is established at the timing of t10, the first CB state ST2 is set as shown in FIG. 26 (f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h).

Then, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 26 (f). Even after the first CB state ST2 is completed, the second section SC2 is continued as shown in FIG. 26 (h), and the game in which the number of bets is “3” is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (a). If so, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26 (h).

Next, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated from the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t12, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the gaming section is the first section SC1 and the normal gaming state ST1. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeatedly executed, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 26 (d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (b) in the situation where the second CB combination is won, the second CB is executed as shown in FIG. 26 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established. When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (g), the transition possible period to the second section SC2 is set. It doesn't become. After that, when the second CB prize is established at the timing of t14, the second CB state ST3 is set from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 26 (f).

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium will be described.

As described above, although the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous game states for the player, the second CB combination is won by first executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". By executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", it is possible to aim at the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. .. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the first CB combination is not in the winning state and that the second CB combination is in the winning state.

27 (a) to 27 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the notification related to the winning state of the first CB combination and the second CB combination executed by the image display device 63.

In a situation where the game can be executed and a situation where the game is being executed, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 as shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c). .. In this case, in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 27 (a). .. The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed at a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won continues.

As the non-internal notification image G12, the non-internal explicit image G21 showing that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. A non-internal digestion game number image G22 showing the number of games played in the situation is displayed. As the non-internal explicit image G21, the character image "returning" is specifically displayed. As a result, it is clarified that neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination has been won.

As the non-internal digestion game number image G22, specifically, a character image showing the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won is displayed, such as "010 game". .. In this case, the first game in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the partial clear processing (step S104) or the entire clear processing (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. Until the completion, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22. Further, until the first game in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, the non-internal digestion game number image G22 is used. "000 games" is displayed. After that, regardless of whether the game has a bet number of "3" or a game having a bet number of "2", the number of games displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 each time one game is executed is 1 is added.

In the situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the 2nd CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the 2nd CB combination is won. As shown in b), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, although the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, the image clearly indicating that the second CB combination is in the winning state is not displayed on the image display device 63.

In the situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the 1st CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "3", and the 1st CB combination is won. As shown in c), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the first internal explicit image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB combination has been won is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63. The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed at a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal explicit image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the gaming state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. Further, also in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. The specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, but for example, in a situation where the predetermined character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be displayed dimly. .. Further, an image showing the number of remaining payouts of the game medium required by the end of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various bet number-related notifications are executed as notifications related to the winning states of the first CB combination and the second CB combination. Specifically, as a bet number-related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, if the second CB combination is won in a game in which the number of bets is "2", the reel The winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed by the timing when the stop operation of 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. The execution mode of the notification of winning the second CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. The notification of winning correspondence of the second CB combination is generated when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination even after the game in which the second CB combination is won.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the two-bet correspondence notification is executed. The execution mode of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The 2-bet correspondence notification is that the number of bets is "2" when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination. It does not occur after the second game of the game.

In the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The execution mode of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "three sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The 3-bet correspondence notification is repeated without sandwiching a game in which the number of bets is "3" and a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In this case, it does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game in which the number of bets is "3".

In the situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is effective when the 1st CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "3". The winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is executed by the timing when becomes. The execution mode of the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the first CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. However, the notification of winning correspondence of the first CB combination occurs only in the game in which the first CB combination is won, and the game in which the number of bets in the winning state of the first CB combination thereafter is "2" and the number of bets is "3". It doesn't run in any of the games.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the two-bet correspondence notification is executed. The execution mode of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. In the 2-bet correspondence notification, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur after the second game of the game.

Next, a state in which various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 (a) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “2”, FIG. 28 (b) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 28 (c) shows the number of bets. Shows the period during which the notification sound at the time of "2" bet, which occurs when the game in which "2" is executed, is output, and FIG. 28 (d) shows the period in which the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. FIG. 28 (e) shows a period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. (F) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 28 (g) shows the period during which the first CB combination is won, and FIG. 28 (h) shows the first. The period in which the 2CB combination is won is shown, FIG. 28 (i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 28 (j) shows the period in which the image display device 63 is in the CB state. Indicates the period during which the display is performed.

By starting the supply of the operating power to the slot machine 10, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) is being executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 28 (e).

Then, at the timing of t2, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 28 (b). In this case, since the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is supported as shown in FIG. 28 (d). The notification sound is output. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "3" is being executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Will be. Further, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

As shown in FIG. 28B at the timing of t3, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets after the second time is "3", which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is intentionally repeated in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is repeatedly executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Further, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, as shown in FIG. 28B at the timing of t4, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, as shown in FIG. 28 (g), the first CB combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is output. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won. Further, the notification of winning correspondence of the first CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB combination is won. .. Further, at the timing of t4, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB combination is won at the timing of t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB winning. In this case, at the timing of t5, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (e), and the first display in the image display device 63 is as shown in FIG. 28 (f). The display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 28 (g) and 28 (i), the first CB prize is established, and the game shifts to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing of t7, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (f), and the image display device 63 is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (j). The display during the CB state is started.

Then, at the timing of t8, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, as shown in FIG. 28 (j), the display during the CB state in the image display device 63 is continued. After that, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated, and the first CB state ST2 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 28 (i). In this case, at the timing of t9, the CB state display in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (j). Further, since neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 starts at the timing of the t9 as shown in FIG. 28 (e). Will be done. In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, as shown in FIG. 28A at the timing of t10, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. At the timing of t10, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

After that, as shown in FIG. 28A at the timing of t11, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, as shown in FIG. 28 (h), the second CB combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the notification of winning correspondence of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB combination is won. .. Further, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB combination is won at the timing of t12 ends without the establishment of the second CB winning. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 28 (e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet correspondence notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and the second CB role is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall aware of the fact. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Then, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets after the second time is "2", which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28B at each of the timing of t15 and the timing of t16, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since it is originally assumed that the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, the 3-bet correspondence notification and the winning correspondence of the 2nd CB combination are supported for the game. No notification is performed.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet correspondence notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and the second CB role is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall aware of the fact. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Then, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets after the second time is "2", which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium as described above will be described.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an internal notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed by the staging side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not the command at the start of supply is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the main MPU 72 starts supplying the operating power, if there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main RAM 74, the power recovery command is used as the command at the start of the supply in the main process (FIG. 10). Send either a full initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, the power recovery command is the address before the power is cut off without executing the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) when no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74. This command is sent when returning to. The all initialization command is a command transmitted when the all clear process (step S105) is executed as described later. The partial initialization command is a command transmitted when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed as described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the control process at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a control process at the start of supply.

When the all clear process (step S105) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image in the image display device 63 The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear process (step S105) is executed, since the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized as described in detail later, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. It becomes a situation. Therefore, when the all initialization command is received, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 in the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When the partial clear process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), the partial initialization command is executed. Based on the set information, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won (step S1204). When the partial clear process (step S104) is executed, the area where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is not initialized and the area other than the area (the area other than the area) (details will be described later). (Including the area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized.

If the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the main side is executed even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of the operating power is restarted. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of the operating power is restarted. However, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained. As will be described later, information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the partial initialization command. Therefore, in step S1204, it is specified whether or not the information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is included in the partial initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The second CB internal middle flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that the second CB combination is in the winning state.

When the power recovery command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1208). As described above, the power recovery command is set with information indicating whether or not any of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the second CB combination is in the winning state (step S1208: YES), "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1209).

When the second CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is in the winning state based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1210). When the first CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1210: NO), the display of the non-internally notified image G12 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When the first CB combination is in the winning state (step S1210: YES), the display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The first CB internal middle flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that the first CB combination is in the winning state.

Returning to the explanation of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29), when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command is used in this game. It is determined whether or not the first CB winning is established while winning the 1CB combination (step S1104). The main MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the production side MPU 92 in step S815, which is a process executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game are stopped in the reel control process (FIG. 20). The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, and whether or not the winning is established in this game. Information and, if a prize has been established in this game, information on the type of prize for which the prize has been established are set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106). , The display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the second CB combination is won and the second CB combination is won in this game from the information set in the winning result command. It is determined whether or not the 2CB winning is established (step S1108). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1110). ..

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not the first CB winning command or the second CB winning command is received from the main MPU 72. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established in this game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 sends the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 25) when the first CB winning is established, and the CB processing when the second CB winning is established. The second CB winning command is transmitted in step S1009 of (FIG. 25).

If any of the CB winnings is established (step S1111: YES), the CB internal middle flag clearing process is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal middle flag clearing process, when "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94, the first CB internal middle flag is cleared by "0", and the inside of the second CB of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. When "1" is set in the middle flag, the second CB internal middle flag is cleared by "0". After that, the end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, when the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. If so, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated. After that, the display during the CB state in the image display device 63 is started (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not the CB end command is received from the main MPU 72, so that the execution target can be determined. It is determined whether or not the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been set have ended (step S1115). As described above, when the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed are completed, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 25).

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been the execution targets are completed (step S1115: YES), the CB state display in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1116). After that, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), "1" is set for both the first CB internal flag and the second CB internal flag of the effector RAM 94. If is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), the non-internal medium notification process is executed (step S1121). Further, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1119: YES). , The first CB internal notification process is executed (step S1122). Further, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1120: YES). , The second CB internal notification process is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a non-internal medium notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is added by 1 (step S1301). The returning counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the game has been executed since the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63 on the effect side MPU 92, and is set in the returning counter. The numerical value corresponding to the value is displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. When the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after 1 addition is displayed on the non-internal digestion game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1303). As described above, the main MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. (Step S603), and if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "3" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), "1" is set in the "3" bet notified flag (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, a 3-bet correspondence notification for notifying that a game in which the number of bets is "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won is sent. To be executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "Three sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "3" bet notification flag is a flag for the director MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "3" bet notification flag, the "3" bet notification process is not executed, so that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated in the situation, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1304, or when the process of step S1306 is executed, whether or not the first CB combination has been won in this game is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time. Determination (step S1307). When the first CB combination is won (step S1307: YES), the notification process at the time of winning the first CB is executed (step S1308). In the notification process at the time of winning the first CB, the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the first CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, when the number of bets in this game is "2" and the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 Is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won.

After that, it is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time whether or not the second CB combination has been won in this game (step S1310). When the second CB combination is won (step S1310: YES), the notification process at the time of winning the second CB is executed (step S1311). In the notification process at the time of winning the second CB, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first CB internal notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1401). As described above, the main MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. (Step S603), and if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), "1" is set in the "2" bet notified flag (step S1404). In the "2" bet notification process, the 2-bet correspondence notification for notifying that the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the director MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag, the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the first CB combination by not executing the "2" bet notification process. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a second CB internal notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1501). As described above, the main MPU 72 sends a first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. (Step S603), and if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), "1" is set in the "2" bet notified flag (step S1504). In the "2" bet notification process, the 2-bet correspondence notification for notifying that the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the director MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag, the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination by not executing the "2" bet notification process. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or when the process of step S1504 is executed, the notification process at the time of winning the second CB is executed (step S1505). In the notification process at the time of winning the second CB, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. By executing the notification processing at the time of winning the second CB as described above, in the winning state of the second CB combination, every time the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is notified. It will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the area of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in each of the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 34, an address is set in each storage area of the main RAM 74. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, the address of "0000" is set as the start address, the address of "0001" is set as the address of the next order, and the address of "0002" is set as the address of the next order. The address is set so that it will be a serial number after that.

As a storage area corresponding to the start address "0000", a second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set. When the index value IV in which the second CB winning data is set is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the second CB winning data is set in the second CB winning data area, and the second CB winning is established. Clears the 2nd CB winning data from the 2nd CB winning data area.

The first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as the storage area corresponding to the next order "0001" with respect to the starting address "0000". When the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is set is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and the first CB winning is established. Clears the first CB winning data from the first CB winning data area.

As a storage area corresponding to "0002", which is the next order with respect to "0001", a set value storage area, which is an area for storing the set value to be set, is set. The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing a complete clearing process executed in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "0000", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). After that, a clear execution process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1602).

After that, the address update process for setting the target address to the address in the next order in the address of the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1603). As a result, if the target address up to that point is "0000", which is the start address, the target address becomes "0001", and if the target address up to that point is "0001", the target address becomes "0002". ".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the final address set in the main RAM 74 in the following order. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processes of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all the storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process of step S1602 in this all clear process. After that, an all initialization command indicating that the all clearing process has been executed for the main RAM 74 is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing a partial clearing process executed in step S104 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "0001", which is an address in the following order with respect to the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is a storage area corresponding to the start address "0000" of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of clearing "0" and is excluded from the execution target of the initial setting process (step S1705). Is also excluded. After that, a clear execution process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1702).

After that, the address update process for setting the target address to the address in the next order in the address of the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1703). As a result, if the target address up to that point is "0001", which is the address in the next order with respect to the start address of the main RAM 74, the target address becomes "0002" and the target address up to that point is "0002". If it is, the target address becomes "0003".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the final address set in the main RAM 74 in the following order. If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 in this way, all of the storage areas of the main RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main RAM 74, are covered. "0" is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, the initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process of step S1702 in the partial clear process this time. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clearing process has been executed for the main RAM 74 is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is issued with the corresponding information set. Will be sent.

Next, a state in which the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) are executed on the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 36 (a) shows a period in which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a period in which the main process (FIG. 10) is executed in the main MPU 72. c) indicates the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on when the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. 36 (d) shows the execution of the RAM clear operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the set key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the set key and the reset button 56 is pressed. The timing is shown, FIG. 36 (e) shows the period during which the partial clear process (step S104) is executed by the main MPU 72, and FIG. 36 (f) shows the entire clear process (step S105) by the main MPU 72. 36 (g) shows the period in which the first CB combination is won, and FIG. 36 (h) shows the period in which the second CB combination is won.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, and a partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed by the main MPU 72. Will be explained.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (a) at the timing of t1, and the main side is started as shown in FIG. 36 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and a part of the clear process (FIG. 35 (b)) is performed in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36 (e) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 thereafter. Is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB is also started after the timing of t3. The state in which the winning data is stored is maintained. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

When the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed so that the operating power to the main MPU 72 in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. Even if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently restarted when the supply of the set value is stopped, after the execution of the set value update process (step S106). It is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB role. As a result, the manager of the game hall repeatedly executes the game in which the number of bets is "2" before the opening of the game hall to make the second CB winning state a winning state, every time the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent the event of having to occur.

Next, with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes all clear processing (FIG. 35A). The case will be described.

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 36D, the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is pressed. When the RAM clear operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (a) at the timing of t4, and the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at, and the entire clear process (FIG. 35 (a)) is executed by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36 (f) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 thereafter. Will be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB winning is performed at the timing of t6. The data will be erased. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clear operation is performed as described above, the all clear process (FIG. 35 (a)) is executed so that the second CB winning data is erased, so that the all clear process is illegally performed (FIG. 35). When (a)) is executed, it is possible to make the situation that the first CB combination and the second CB combination have not been won. Then, if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as it is without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player may shift to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. It will be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clearing process (FIG. 35A).

Next, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, and a partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed by the main MPU 72. This case will be described.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 36C, the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 36 (a) at the timing of t7, and the main side is started as shown in FIG. 36 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and a part of the clear process (FIG. 35 (b)) is performed by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36 (e) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9 thereafter. Is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the first CB winning is performed at the timing of t9. The data will be erased. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

In the original game, the first CB winning data is deleted even if the partial clearing process (FIG. 35 (b)) is executed when the setting update start operation is performed as described above. It is possible to eliminate the state in which the first CB winning data, which is an abnormal state, is stored when the set value is changed.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main MPU 72, and the case where "1" is set in the second section flag is the second section SC2. The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the lottery process for the number of released games in step S1810 are not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processes after step S1803 are not executed. As a result, even if the first section SC1 is in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, a process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, a direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and step S1810. The lottery process for the number of released games will not be executed.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing after step S1804 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting to the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and the release game in step S1810. The number lottery process will not be executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination (step S1804). ). If the lottery process for this combination (FIG. 16) is out of order (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806. And the lottery process of the number of released games in step S1810 is not executed.

When any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this time (step S1804: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the main RAM 74 Clear each of the continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total acquisition number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the above (step S1805). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

The continuous game number counter 74c is for specifying the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1 by the main MPU 72. It is a counter of. When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit game number (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, The second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d sets the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media given by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the game medium is given). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number, the number is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) in the second section SC2, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, The second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

After that, the direct hit lottery process is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, the direct hit lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to win the direct hit in the pseudo bonus state ST4 by lottery. do. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 2% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be directly hit and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If there is a 1% chance of winning the pseudo-bonus state ST4 directly, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 10% chance of winning the pseudo-bonus state ST4 directly, and the index value IV = If 14 is won, there is a 5% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be hit directly, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 2% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be hit directly. .. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the direct hit of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is won in the direct hit lottery process (step S1807: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1808). The first transition confirmation flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been won in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed when the transition to the second section SC2 is performed. It is a flag. When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed when the current game ends.

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

When the direct hit lottery process does not result in the direct hit winning of the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S1807: NO), the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S1810). The number of released games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later. It is a counter for specifying. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table of the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the released game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step). S1811). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

After that, the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to set the second section SC2 from the beginning. It is determined by lottery whether the section display unit 67 is lit (that is, immediately lit) or the section display unit 67 is lit (that is, waiting for lighting) at the time of the subsequent transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a 50% probability and lighting standby is performed with a 50% probability. Is selected, and if the index value IV = 11 is won, the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 65%, the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%, and the index value IV = 12 is won. Has a 62% chance of selecting immediate lighting and a 38% probability of selecting lighting standby, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, an 80% probability of immediate lighting is selected and a 20% probability of 20%. When lighting standby is selected and the index value IV = 14 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 75% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25%, and the index value IV = 15 is won. In the case, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70%, lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%, and if the index value IV = 16 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 40% and 60%. Lighting standby is selected with a probability, and when the index value IV = 17 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 30% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), "1" is set in the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1813: NO). Step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. The second control process of the game section is executed in step S907 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the second control processing of the game section is also the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Is executed after all are stopped.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), the current state of the flag of the main RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S1902). The end preparation state ST6 is a case where the pseudo bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and the second section SC2 ends at the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1. It is a game state that shifts to.

When the end preparation state is ST6 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1903). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S905) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21), the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 0 games, and the second section when shifting to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. When it is specified that the SC2 is in the end state, the flag for setting the end preparation state ST6 is set and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". Further, in the AT processing (step S906) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21), the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 is 0 games, and the second section when shifting to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. When it is specified that the SC2 is in the end state, the flag for setting the end preparation state ST6 is set and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: NO), after setting "1" in the end preparation completion flag (step S1904), the processes after step S1905 are executed. When "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, the process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S1914). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 includes a counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. By clearing various data (including the pseudo bonus state flag) indicating that, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, it is shown that the AT state ST5 includes a counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. By clearing various data (including the AT state flag), the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current gaming state is any of the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of released games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and then The remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new transition to the second section SC2. Although the second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2 even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 Will continue as it is without being terminated.

After that, when the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S1915). As a result, the notification that the section display unit 67 is the second section SC2 is terminated. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S1916). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

When the end preparation state is not ST6 (step S1902: NO), or when the process of step S1904 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1905). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c sets the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after 1 addition is 1500 or more, which is the upper limit number of games (step S1906). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 are as described above. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1 and AT. If the state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly terminated and becomes the normal game state ST1.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), whether the first chance replay prize, the second chance replay prize, or the normal replay prize is established in this game. It is determined whether or not (step S1907). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in this game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S1907, and this game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Regardless of which of the game states ST3, pseudo-bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5, the game state is subject to the determination in step S1907.

When none of the replay winnings is established (step S1907: NO), the bet number (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) of this game is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). .. In this case, even if the replay winning is established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to the replay due to the establishment of the replay winning, the bet number of this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a) is established. Value) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d determines the total net increase in the number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media given by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the game medium is given). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number, the number is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value.

After that, one of the small winning combination prizes (1st to 9th supplementary prizes, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize and cherry prize) in which the game medium is given in this game ) Is determined (step S1909). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in this game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S1909, and this game is in the normal gaming state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Regardless of which of the game states ST3, pseudo-bonus state ST4, and AT state ST5, the game state is subject to the determination in step S1909. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the number of game media assigned in this game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1910).

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or when the process of step S1910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S1911). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, since the bet number of the current game number is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d in step S1908, for example, any small winning combination is established in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after shifting to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S1911, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, from "the total number of game media given by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game medium is not given)" to "the second section". When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in the situation where the game is not executed) ”is set as the predetermined difference number. With the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value, the limited total net increase number of game media, which is the number of the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d. It becomes possible.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step S1907, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S1911, or when the process of step S1912 is executed, whether the value of the total acquired number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400". It is determined whether or not (step S1913). When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 in steps S1914 to S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 are as described above. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and becomes the normal game state ST1 and AT. If the state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly terminated and becomes the normal game state ST1.

Here, if any of the replay prizes is established, the process of steps S1908 to S1912 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1907. In a game in which a replay prize is established, the game medium owned by the player at the start is used when setting a bet, but the profit from the establishment of the replay prize is the same as the number of bets in the game in which the replay prize is established. It is possible to replay a new game based on the number of bets. That is, in the game in which the replay prize is established, the number of game media owned by the player does not change. In this case, by not executing the processes of steps S1908 to S1912 in the game in which the replay prize is established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It is possible to omit the execution of the process for changing the value, and it is possible to omit the unnecessary execution of the process.

On the other hand, even in the game in which the replay winning is established, in step S1913, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquired number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400". As a result, in the game before the game in which the replay prize was established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400", but the second cause is noise or the like. Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. It becomes possible to execute the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, the ending correspondence process is executed (step S1917). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the ending correspondence process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2001). The first ending flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of game executions in the second section SC2, which is measured using the continuous game number counter 74c, is likely to reach the upper limit number of games. Is.

When "1" is not set in the first ending flag (step S2001: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the main It is determined whether or not the sum with the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 (step S2002). The pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by the main MPU 72. The AT continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72. The maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games as already described. The maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, "1" is set in the first ending flag (step S2003). When "1" is set in the first ending flag, the details will be described later, but the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is not satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5. Is not generated, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 surely ends and shifts to the first section SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the transition condition to the AT state ST5 from being satisfied in the situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, and the remaining continuous game of the AT state ST5. It is possible to prevent further addition of numbers from occurring.

After that, the first ending command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2004). The first ending command contains information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, information corresponding to the difference in the value of the continuous game number counter 74c with respect to the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. included.

By receiving the first ending command, the staging-side MPU 92 can grasp that the first ending flag is set to "1" in the main-side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not been started, if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the first ending command is received. With this as an opportunity, the execution mode of the effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, the production side MPU 92 shifts to the AT state ST5 when the first ending command is received in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not been started and the gaming state is not the AT state ST5. In this case, the execution mode of the effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. The situation where "1" is set in the first ending flag basically occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, but it can also occur in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Further, even if "1" is set in the first ending flag in the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, or the pseudo bonus state ST4, the game content is not changed and the execution mode of the effect is not changed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, a negative determination is made in step S2002, or the process of step S2004 is executed, is "1" set in the second ending flag provided in the main RAM 74? It is determined whether or not (step S2005). The second ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that the limited total net increase number of game media measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number. It is a flag.

When "1" is not set in the second ending flag (step S2005: NO), the sum of the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is the sum of the acquisition of the game medium in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. It is determined whether or not the result of adding the value of the result of integrating the expected values to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 (step S2006). The expected value of acquisition of the game medium in one game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is about five. The upper limit net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2 is set to 2400 as described above. The upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400, and may be less than 2400 or more than 2400.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, "1" is set in the second ending flag (step S2007). When "1" is set in the second ending flag, the details will be described later, but the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is not satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5. Is not generated, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 surely ends and shifts to the first section SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the transition condition to the AT state ST5 from being satisfied in the situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, and the remaining continuous game of the AT state ST5. It is possible to prevent further addition of numbers from occurring.

After that, the second ending command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2008). The second ending command contains information on the limited total net increase in the number of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d with respect to the upper limit net increase in the second section SC2. Contains information corresponding to the difference between.

By receiving the second ending command, the staging-side MPU 92 can grasp that the second ending flag is set to "1" in the main-side MPU 72. When the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not been started, if the gaming state at that time is the AT state ST5, the second ending command is received. With this as an opportunity, the execution mode of the effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. On the other hand, when the production side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the production according to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not been started and the gaming state is not the AT state ST5, the production state shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the execution mode of the effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is set to the execution mode corresponding to the ending period. The situation where "1" is set in the second ending flag occurs in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, but does not occur in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, or the second CB state ST3. Further, even if "1" is set in the second ending flag in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game content is not changed and the execution mode of the effect is not changed.

<About normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a process that is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2101). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main MPU 72, and "1" may be set in the second section flag. The second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S2101: NO), the processing after step S2102 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the process for shifting the gaming state from step S2106 to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2101: YES), if the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 (step S2102: YES), the advantageous state at the start of the game. (Step S2103). The processing for the advantageous state at the start of the game will be described later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2101: YES) and the game state is neither the pseudo bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5 (step S2102: NO), the current game. It is determined whether or not the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: YES), the processes after step S2105 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for shifting the gaming state in the step S2106 or later to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed. ..

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2105). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2105: NO), the processing after step S2106 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the process for shifting the gaming state in the step S2106 or later to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not executed.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2105: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the reference number of games (step S2106), and the total number of acquisitions counter. It is determined whether or not the value of 74d is equal to or greater than the reference acquisition number (step S2107). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c sets the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying. When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The second section SC2 is terminated at, and the first section SC1 is set to the normal game state ST1. Further, as described above, the total acquisition number counter 74d is a limited total net increase of the game medium from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying the number of sheets by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media given by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the game medium is given). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number, the number is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) in the second section SC2, the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST4. The second section SC2 is terminated at, and the first section SC1 is set to the normal game state ST1.

The reference number of games is set as a number of games smaller than 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2, and is specifically 1450 games. The standard acquisition number is set as a number smaller than the upper limit net increase of 2400 in the second section SC2, and specifically, it is 2150.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the reference number of games (step S2106: YES), or when the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or greater than the reference acquisition number (step S2107: YES), the main RAM 74 is provided. “1” is set in the third transition confirmation flag that has been set (step S2108). The third transition confirmation flag indicates that the maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard number of games, or that the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard acquisition number. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to this.

When "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed when the current game ends. That is, in the normal game state ST1, when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is almost satisfied in the pre-end period, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly set. As a result, it is possible to give the benefit of generating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the arrival in the normal game state ST1 during the previous period of the end. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is started when "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag, 50 games are set as the number of continuous games at the start. The number of continuous games set at the start is the difference between 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, and 1450 games, which is the reference number of games. Further, since the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is about 5 as already explained, the product of the number of continuous games set at the start and the expected acquisition value is the second section. The difference between the upper limit net increase of 2400 sheets of SC2 and the standard acquisition number of 2150 sheets is the same or substantially the same.

After executing the process of step S2108, various clear processes are executed (step S2109). In various clearing processes, the values of the second transition confirmation flag and the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 are each cleared to "0". The second transition confirmation flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later, and the transition standby counter is set to "1" in the second transition confirmation flag. It is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) has been exhausted. By winning the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2112), not only the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", but also the transition standby counter is set to the value corresponding to the number of transition standby games, and the second transition is performed. The value of the transition standby counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted in the situation where "1" is set in the confirmation flag. Then, in the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag, the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0", so that the gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the number of transition waiting games is exhausted, so that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs. In this case, when "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag as described above, the second transition confirmation flag is set even if "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag at that time. "0" is cleared. As a result, the pseudo bonus state ST4 triggered by the setting of "1" in the third transition confirmation flag is generated, and the pseudo bonus state triggered by the setting of "1" in the second transition confirmation flag. It is possible to give priority to the occurrence of ST4.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than the reference game number and the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than the reference acquisition number (step S2106 and step S2107: NO), the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set. On condition that "1" is not set (step S2110: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination. (Step S2111). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, the transition lottery process is executed (step S2112). In the transition lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4 by using the transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST4 will be won and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If so, there is a 10% chance of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 40% chance of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the index value IV = If you win 14, there is a 30% chance that you will win the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and if you win the index value IV = 15, you will have a 20% chance of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. .. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition winning of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is obtained in the transition lottery process (step S2113: YES), the bonus type determination process for determining the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed (step S2114). In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a big bonus having a relatively high advantage and a regular bonus having a relatively low advantage are set. The big bonus is a pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the game with the number of bets "3" is executed 50 times, and the regular bonus is the pseudo-bonus that continues until the game with the number of bets "3" is executed 20 times. The state is ST4. If the big bonus is relatively more advantageous than the regular bonus, the number of each game is arbitrary. Also, if the big bonus is relatively more advantageous than the regular bonus, the number of continuous games is the same in both bonuses, but the expected value of the game medium in one game is the big bonus rather than the regular bonus. Due to the high value, the big bonus may be configured to be relatively more advantageous than the regular bonus. The processing content of the bonus type determination process will be described later.

After that, "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2115), and the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) is set in the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74. The value corresponding to is set (step S2116). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), and the transition standby counter has "1" in the second transition confirmation flag. It is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition waiting games (specifically, 5 games) has been consumed since it was set. By winning the transition in the transition lottery process (step S2112), not only the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", but also the transition standby counter is set to the value corresponding to the number of transition standby games, and the second transition is performed. The value of the transition standby counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted in the situation where "1" is set in the confirmation flag. Then, in the situation where "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag, the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0", so that the gaming state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the number of transition waiting games is exhausted, so that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal processing is executed in step S904 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21). As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2201: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2202). If the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred at the start of this game and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed at the time of determining the transition has won the direct hit, the first transition confirmation flag Is set to "1".

When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag (step S2202: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2203). In the first start setting process, "1" is set in the pseudo bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74. Further, in the first start setting process, a value corresponding to 50 games, which is the number of continuous games of the big bonus, is set as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. That is, in the configuration in which the big bonus and the regular bonus, which have relatively high and low advantages as the pseudo bonus state ST4, are set, the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) results in the direct hit winning, so that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is entered. In case of transition, it will be transition to big bonus. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter mainly consists of the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is a counter for specifying by the side MPU 72.

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2204). The first start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is newly started in a situation where "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. In addition, the first start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 50 games.

When the first start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the big bonus, displays the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and shows the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The display is done. FIG. 42A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the first start command is received.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the image display device 63, a moving image corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag is displayed. The first effect image G31 to be played, the game number image G32 showing the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4, and the acquired number image G33 showing the number of game media acquired by the player in the pseudo bonus state ST4. Is displayed. In the first effect image G31, in a state where a predetermined character image is displayed in front of a predetermined background image, a moving image display in which the display mode of the predetermined background image and the predetermined character image changes is performed. Number of games In the image G32, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started, the initial number of continuous games is displayed, and after that, one game is digested and the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is subtracted by 1. The number displayed in the game number image G32 is subtracted by 1. Further, when the remaining number of continuous games is added in the pseudo bonus state ST4, the number corresponding to the number of games targeted for the addition is added to the number displayed in the game number image G32. In the acquired number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards are acquired" is displayed, and then the game is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, so that the game medium owned by the player is owned. When is increased, the number of game media corresponding to the increase is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 41), when "1" is not set in the first migration confirmation flag (step S2202: NO), "1" is set in the third migration confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (step S2205). As already explained, the third transition confirmation flag means that the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard number of games, or the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard acquisition number. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to the above.

When "1" is set in the third transition confirmation flag (step S2205: YES), the second start setting process is executed (step S2206). In the second start setting process, "1" is set in the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74. Further, in the second start setting process, a value corresponding to 50 games, which is the number of continuous games of the big bonus, is set as the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74. That is, in the configuration in which the big bonus and the regular bonus, which have relatively high and low advantages as the pseudo-bonus state ST4, are set, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference number of games. If the total net increase in the number of limited game media in the two-section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard acquisition number, and the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game shifts to the big bonus.

After that, the second start command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2207). The second start command is a command indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 is newly started in the situation where the ending condition is satisfied or the ending condition is likely to be satisfied. In addition, the second start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 50 games.

When the second start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and also displays the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. However, unlike the case where the first start command is received, the display indicating the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is not performed. Pseudo-bonus state ST4 due to the fact that the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard number of games, or that the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the standard acquisition number. In the case of shifting to, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games before the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 becomes "0", or the game medium of the second section SC2. When the limited total net increase number reaches the upper limit net increase number, the pseudo bonus state ST4 may end with the end of the second section SC2. In this case, by preventing the display indicating the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 from being displayed as described above, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second start command is received. As shown in FIG. 42 (b), in the image display device 63, the situation where the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or more than the reference number of games or the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 is the reference acquisition. The second effect image G41 in which the moving image corresponding to the situation corresponding to the number or more is displayed, and the acquired number image G33 showing the number of game media acquired by the player in the pseudo bonus state ST4 are displayed. There is. In the second effect image G41, in a state where the specific character image is displayed in front of the specific background image, the moving image display in which the display mode of the specific background image and the specific character image changes is performed. In the acquired number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards are acquired" is displayed, and then the game is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, so that the game medium owned by the player is owned. When is increased, the number of game media corresponding to the increase is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 41), when "1" is not set in the third transition confirmation flag (step S2205: NO), the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Whether or not it is determined (step S2208). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: YES), the processes after step S2209 are not executed. In the process after step S2209, the process of subtracting the number of games required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the digestion of one game is executed, and the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is satisfied with the digestion of the game. In that case, the process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by not executing the processing after step S2209, even if the game is digested in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, it is pseudo. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the transition to the bonus state ST4 closer.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2209). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2209: NO), the processing after step S2210 is not executed. As described above, in the process after step S2210, the process of subtracting the number of games required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the digestion of one game is executed, and the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 with the digestion of the game is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if the game with the bet number "2" is executed, the process after step S2210 is not executed, so that even if the game with the bet number "2" is digested, it is pseudo. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a factor that brings the transition to the bonus state ST4 closer.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2209: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2210). As described above, the second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112).

When "1" is set in the second transition confirmation flag (step S2210: YES), the value of the transition standby counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2211). As already explained, the transition standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been consumed since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". Is. When the value of the migration wait counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2212: YES), the third start setting process is executed (step S2213). The details will be described later, but in the third start setting process, a process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed.

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2214). The first start command contains information indicating that the initial number of continuous games is 50 if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is a big bonus, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is a regular bonus. For example, it contains information indicating that the number of initial continuous games is 20 games.

When the first start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 has the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as the upper lamp 61 and the speaker, as in the case where the effect side MPU 92 receives the first start command transmitted in step S2204. It is executed by 62 and the image display device 63. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the game number image G32, and the acquired number image G33.

When "1" is not set in the second transition confirmation flag (step S2210: NO), the value of the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2215). The release game number counter 74e is the remaining number of games required to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST4 in a situation where "1" is not set in any of the first to third transition confirmation flags of the main RAM 74. It is a counter for specifying the number of released games by the main MPU 72. When the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) does not result in a direct hit, the number of unlocked games is set for the unlocked game counter 74e. Even when the second section SC2 is maintained after the AT state ST5 ends, the number of released games is set for the released game number counter 74e.

When the value of the release game number counter 74e after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2216: YES), the third start setting process is executed (step S2213). The details will be described later, but in the third start setting process, a process for shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed.

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2215). The first start command contains information indicating that the initial number of continuous games is 50 if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is a big bonus, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is a regular bonus. For example, it contains information indicating that the number of initial continuous games is 20 games.

When the first start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 has the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as the upper lamp 61 and the speaker, as in the case where the effect side MPU 92 receives the first start command transmitted in step S2204. It is executed by 62 and the image display device 63. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the game number image G32, and the acquired number image G33.

When the process of step S2207 is executed or the process of step S2214 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2217). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state. When "1" is set in the lighting standby flag (step S2217: YES), the lighting processing of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S2218). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. When the process of step S2220 is executed, the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0".

When the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs in the situation where "1" is set in the lighting standby flag as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lighting state. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a game in which the expected net increase in the game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") can be 1 or more. It is a state. That is, although the section display unit 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when it shifts to the gaming state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more. .. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in the game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more.

Next, an effect showing that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs during the transition waiting period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

The migration waiting period is a period in which "1" is set in the second migration confirmation flag and the value of the migration waiting counter is 1 or more. When 5 games are exhausted in the transition waiting period, the game shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST4, but in the final game of this transition waiting period, the stop result after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is used for pseudo. An effect that makes the player aware that the transition to the bonus state ST4 will occur can be executed.

43 (a), 44 (a) and 44 (b) show reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the case where the winning combination is not won in any index value IV in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of, and the combination of symbols which can stop in a main line ML.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L when the result is lost in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). In this case, when the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed aiming at the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are on the mainline ML. (See FIG. 44 (a)). Further, in the case where the winning combination is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L → the right reel 32R, and “Red 7”. When the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed aiming at the symbols, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the subline SL1 (FIG. 44 (b). )reference).

The event that the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML is a reel when the result is out of the lottery process (Fig. 16). It does not occur except when the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R → the left reel 32L. In addition, the event that the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 is a reel when the winning combination result is lost in the lottery process (FIG. 16). It does not occur except when the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L → the right reel 32R. In addition, when the result is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L and middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right. When the stop order is other than the reel 32R, the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol is not displayed as a stop on any of the main line ML and the sub lines SL1 to SL4. , The combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is not stopped and displayed on any of the main line ML and the sub lines SL1 to SL4.

FIG. 45 (a) shows that when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is missed in the final game of the transition waiting period, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is big. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the bonus is notified by the stop result of reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

When the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is missed in the final game in the transition waiting period in the situation where it is decided to shift to the big bonus, the image display device 63 shows as shown in FIG. 45 (a1). The first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. A display is made to indicate that the symbol should be aimed. Further, in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 45 (a2), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is displayed. Will be done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red" symbol are placed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 45 (a3). 7 ”The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R not only causes the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but also informs that the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus.

FIG. 45B shows that when the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is missed in the final game of the transition waiting period, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is regular. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the bonus is notified by the stop result of reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

When the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is missed in the final game in the transition waiting period in the situation where it is decided to shift to the regular bonus, the image display device 63 shows as shown in FIG. 45 (b1). The first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The display corresponding to the stop order is performed, and "Red 7" is displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A display is made to indicate that the symbol should be aimed. Further, in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 45 (b2), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is displayed. Will be done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" are placed on the subline SL1 as shown in FIG. 45 (b3). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R not only causes the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but also informs that the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a regular bonus.

43 (b), 44 (c) and 44 (d) show the stop order and main line of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the combination of symbols which can stop in ML.

As described above, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 16 which can be won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game state which is not the CB state (first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3). ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel. When it becomes 32L and the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is performed aiming at the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" are on the main line ML. The combination of symbols stops (see FIG. 44 (c)).

When the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R → the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning is won. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the combinations of the established symbols are the "replay" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "replay" symbol, in addition to the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol. A combination of "replay" symbols, a "replay" symbol, a combination of "red 7" symbols and "replay" symbols, and a combination of "replay" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols are set. In each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "replay" symbol is arranged so as not to be missed. Therefore, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the "red 7" symbol cannot be stopped on the main line ML when the middle reel 32L is first stopped. Even so, the "replay" symbol stops on the mainline ML, and finally the combination of the "replay" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "replay" symbol stops on the mainline ML. Further, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the "red 7" symbol is stopped on the main line ML of the middle reel 32M, and then the right reel 32R is stopped second. Even if the "BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the mainline ML, the "replay" symbol will stop on the mainline ML, and finally the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol and The combination of "replay" symbols will stop on the mainline ML. Further, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the "Red 7" symbol is stopped on the main line ML of the middle reel 32M and "Red 7" is stopped on the main line ML of the right reel 32R. Even if the "Red 7" symbol cannot be stopped on the main line ML when the left reel 32L is stopped third after the "BAR" symbol is stopped, the "Replay" symbol is on the main line ML. After stopping, the combination of the "replay" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol will finally stop on the mainline ML. As a result, even if the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML in relation to the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the normal replay is performed. The prize will surely be established.

When the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) as described above, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R → the left reel 32L. In the configuration that ensures that the normal replay prize is established, in the middle reel 32M, the middle reel 32M is stopped so that the "Red 7" symbol has priority over the "replay" symbol and is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Control is performed, and in the right reel 32R, the stop control of the right reel 32R is performed so that the "BAR" symbol has priority over the "replay" symbol and is stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and in the left reel 32L. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the "Red 7" symbol has priority over the "Replay" symbol and is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Therefore, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel. When it becomes 32R and the stop operation of each stop button 42 to 44 is performed aiming at the "red 7" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "bell" are on the main line ML. The combination of symbols stops. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol stops on the subline SL1.

When the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L → the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning is won. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the combinations of the established symbols are the "watermelon" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "bell" symbol combination, as well as the "replay" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "replay" symbol. A combination of symbols is set. In each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "replay" symbol is arranged so as not to be missed. Therefore, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the "red 7" symbol cannot be stopped on the main line ML when the middle reel 32L is first stopped. Even so, the "replay" symbol stops on the mainline ML, and finally the combination of the "replay" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "replay" symbol stops on the mainline ML. As a result, even if the combination of the "watermelon" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "bell" symbol is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML due to the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the normal replay prize is won. Will surely hold.

On the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol is arranged so as not to be missed, and on the right reel 32R, the "bell" symbol is arranged so as not to be missed. Therefore, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the "red 7" symbol can be stopped on the main line ML when the middle reel 32L is first stopped. In this case, when the left reel 32L is stopped as the second stop and the right reel 32R is stopped as the third stop, "watermelon" is placed on the main line ML regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 42 and the right stop button 44. The combination of the symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "bell" symbol is stopped. However, while 6 "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, only one "red 7" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L, and 5 "bells" are arranged on the right reel 32R. While the symbols are arranged, only one "red 7" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R. Therefore, even if the combination of the "watermelon" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "bell" symbol is stopped on the main line ML, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" are on the sub line SL1. It is possible that the combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed.

When the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) as described above, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L → the right reel 32R. In the configuration that ensures that the normal replay prize is established, in the middle reel 32M, the middle reel 32M is stopped so that the "red 7" symbol has priority over the "replay" symbol and is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Control is done. Therefore, the combination of the "watermelon" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "bell" symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and as a result, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are easily displayed on the sub line SL1. The combination of "Red 7" symbols is likely to be stopped and displayed.

The event that the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML is when the index value IV = 16 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16). This does not occur except when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L. In addition, the event that the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 wins the index value IV = 16 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). In this case, it does not occur except when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R. Further, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L and middle reel 32M → left reel. When the stop order is other than 32L → right reel 32R, the combination of the "replay" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "replay" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 43 (b). The combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed on either the main line ML or the sub lines SL1 to SL4, and the main line ML and the sub lines SL1 to SL4 are further displayed. In any case, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is not stopped and displayed.

When the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 16) is won at the index value IV = 16 in the final game of the transition waiting period, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is a big bonus. When it is notified by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in the image display device 63, the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the left as shown in FIG. 45 (b1). A display corresponding to the stop order in which the reels 32L and the third stop is the right reel 32R is displayed, and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. Further, in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 45 (b2), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is displayed. Will be done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" are displayed on the subline SL1 as shown in FIG. 44 (d). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

When the lottery process (Fig. 16) of the winning combination is won at the index value IV = 16 in the final game of the transition waiting period, the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo bonus state ST4 is a regular bonus. When it is notified by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in the image display device 63, the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is on the right as shown in FIG. 45 (a1). A display corresponding to the stop order in which the reels 32R and the third stop is the left reel 32L is displayed, and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. Further, in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 45 (a2), the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is displayed. Will be done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" are placed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44 (c). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

As described above, if the result is out of the lottery process (FIG. 16), the main line is when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L. The combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on the ML, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R. In this case, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol may be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. Further, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R → the left reel 32L. The combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R. When becomes, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol may be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. Therefore, in the final game of the transition waiting period, if the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is missed or the index value IV = 16 is won, the transition is performed by using the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Pseudo-bonus state It is possible to notify whether the type of ST4 is a big bonus or a regular bonus.

In the final game of the transition waiting period, when the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost or the index value IV = 16 is won and the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, The display corresponding to the notified stop order is performed on the combined display unit 66. As a result, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63 whose display is controlled by the effect side MPU 92, the combined display unit 66 whose display is controlled by the main side MPU 72 corresponds to it. It is possible to make the display to be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the final game of the transition waiting period, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost or the index value IV = 16 is won, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed on the image display device 63. Even when the stop order of is notified, the combined display unit 66 may be configured so that the display corresponding to the stop order is not performed. For example, the combined display unit 66 may be maintained in the off state, or the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display a display that does not correspond to the stop order.

If the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is missed in the final game of the transition waiting period, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L, a big bonus. The stop result indicating that is is displayed, and if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L → the right reel 32R, the stop result indicating that it is a regular bonus is displayed. On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is won at the index value IV = 16 in the final game of the transition waiting period, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left. If the reel is 32L, a stop result indicating that it is a regular bonus is displayed, and if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R, it is a stop indicating that it is a big bonus. The result is displayed. That is, the stop order and regular bonus of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for displaying the stop result indicating that it is a big bonus in the case of the off result and the case of winning with the index value IV = 16. The relationship of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for displaying the stop result indicating the above is the reverse relationship. As a result, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the final game of the transition waiting period, the stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes either a big bonus or a regular bonus. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the corresponding stop result is displayed.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the above notification will be described. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing a bonus type determination process executed by the main MPU 72. The bonus type determination process is executed in step S2114 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game.

First, the bonus type lottery process is executed (step S2301). In the bonus type lottery process, the type lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to give a big bonus to the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that has been won this time. And decide whether to make a regular bonus. The type lottery table is set so that the selection probability of the big bonus and the regular bonus is 50% regardless of the result of the lottery process (Fig. 16) of this time, but it is not limited to this. Instead, the big bonus may have a higher selection probability than the regular bonus, and the regular bonus may have a higher selection probability than the big bonus. The result of the lottery process for this role (Fig. 16). The selection ratio of the big bonus and the regular bonus may be changed according to the situation.

When a regular bonus is selected in the bonus type lottery process (step S2302: NO), the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2307). When a big bonus is selected in the bonus type lottery process (step S2302: YES), "1" is set in the big winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2303). The big winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the big bonus has been selected in the bonus type lottery process.

After that, the reel effect lottery process is executed (step S2304). The reel effect is a game in which a stop result indicating that the final game of the transition waiting period is a regular bonus is displayed once in a situation where it is decided to shift to the big bonus, and then the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4 thereafter. It is an effect to stop and display the combination of symbols indicating that it is a big bonus at the start of. In the reel effect lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the reel effect by using the reel effect lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. The reel effect lottery table is set so that the reel effect is won with a probability of 30%, but this probability is arbitrary. When the reel effect is won (step S2305: YES), "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2306). The reel effect generation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the reel effect should be generated.

FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing a third start setting process executed by the main MPU 72. The third start setting process is executed in step S2213 in the normal process (FIG. 41).

First, "1" is set in the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2401). After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the big winning flag of the main side RAM 74, or whether or not the value of the release game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S2402). As described above, when the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), the big bonus is selected in the bonus type lottery process (step S2301) in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46). "1" is set in the flag. Further, the release game number counter 74e is a counter for measuring the number of release games on the main MPU 72 as described above, and in the situation where the value of the release game number counter 74e is "0", the number of release games is "0". This means that an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, "50" is set in the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2403). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that occurs this time becomes a big bonus. After that, the big winning flag is cleared to "0" regardless of whether or not "1" is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2404). On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2402, "20" is set in the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2405). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that occurs this time becomes a regular bonus.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72. The stop order notification control process is performed in step S712, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the combination is completed in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and after the first control process (step S711) of the game section. Will be executed.

When the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 (step S2501: YES), the notification control process for the advantageous state is executed (step S2502). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of bets in this game is "3". On condition that, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is made to be performed on the combined display unit 66, and the first bell prize can be established. A command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be notified by the image display device 63 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. If the number of bets in this game is "2", it is assumed that the index value IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5. Also, the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 is not executed, but the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed as in the case where the number of bets is "3". May be executed.

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the number of bets in this game is "3". On condition that, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is made to be performed on the combined display unit 66, and the second bell prize can be established. A command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be notified by the image display device 63 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. If the number of bets in this game is "2", it is assumed that the index value IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5. Also, the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 is not executed, but the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed as in the case where the number of bets is "3". May be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the value of the transition standby counter of the main RAM 74 is "1" (step S2503). As already explained, the transition standby counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been exhausted since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". It is a counter. The situation where the value of the transition waiting counter is "1" means that this game is the final game of the transition waiting period. If the value of the transition standby counter is not "1" (step S2503: NO), the stop order notification control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2504. Therefore, the processing after step S2504 is not executed in the game other than the final game in the transition waiting period.

When the value of the transition standby counter is "1" (step S2503: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game is an outlier result (step S2504). If the result is off (step S2504: YES), "1" is not set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2505: NO), and "1" is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74. If it is set (step S2506: YES), the display data setting process for middle → right → left is executed (step S2507). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

After that, a command for middle → right → left is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2508). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for middle → right → left, the image shows the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The display device 63 is started. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

When "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2505: YES), or when "1" is not set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2506: NO). The display data setting process for middle → left → right is executed (step S2509). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

After that, a command for middle → left → right is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2510). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for middle → left → right, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is displayed. The image display device 63 is started. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is won at the index value IV = 16 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game (step S2511). When winning with an index value IV = 16, "1" is not set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2512: NO), and "1" is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74. If it is set (step S2513: YES), the display data setting process for middle → left → right is executed (step S2514). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

After that, a command for middle → left → right is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2515). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for middle → left → right, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is displayed. The image display device 63 is started. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

When "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2512: YES), or when "1" is not set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2513: NO). The display data setting process for middle → right → left is executed (step S2516). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

After that, a command for middle → right → left is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2517). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for middle → right → left, the image shows the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The display device 63 is started. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game for which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The normal staging control process is repeatedly executed by the staging side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

When the command for middle → right → left is received (step S2601: YES), the setting process for the effect for middle → right → left is executed (step S2602). In the setting process of the middle → right → left effect, the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Execute the process to start. After that, "1" is set in the final effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2603). The confirmation effect flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 has been confirmed has been executed.

When the command for middle → left → right is received (step S2604: YES), the setting process for the effect for middle → left → right is executed (step S2605). In the setting process of the middle → left → right effect, the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Executes the process to start the reel. After that, "1" is set in the final effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2606).

When the first start command or the second start command is received (step S2607: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the final effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2608). The first start command and the second start command are transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started as described above. That is, in step S2608, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started after the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed is executed.

When "1" is not set in the finalized effect flag (step S2608: NO), the finalized effect setting process is executed (step S2609). In the setting process of the final effect, a process is executed so that the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, or if the process of step S2609 is executed, and if the first start command is received (step S2610: YES), the first setting process of the bonus start effect is executed. (Step S2611). On the other hand, if the second start command is received (step S2610: NO), the second setting process of the bonus start effect is executed (step S2612).

In the first setting process (step S2611) of the bonus start effect, information on the number of initial continuous games included in the first start command received this time is stored in the effect side grasping counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (specifically, Information on 50 games or 20 games) is set. The production side grasp counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST4 measured by the main side MPU 72 by the production side MPU 92. Further, in the first setting process (step S2611) of the bonus start effect, the first pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the first pseudo-bonus data table, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 does not exceed the reference number of games, and further, the second section. The effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the limited total net increase number of game media in SC2 is not equal to or more than the standard acquisition number is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the game number image G32, and the acquired number image G33. Data that enables execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) is set in the first pseudo-bonus data table, and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set. If it continues, the data in the first order in the first pseudo-bonus data table becomes the reference target again.

In the second setting process (step S2612) of the bonus start effect, the information on the number of initial continuous games included in the second start command received this time (specifically, 50 games) is stored in the effect side grasp counter of the effect side RAM 94. Information) is set. Further, in the second setting process (step S2612) of the bonus start effect, the second pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the second pseudo-bonus data table, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference number of games, or the second section SC2. The effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the limited total net increase number of game media in the above is equal to or more than the reference acquisition number is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquired number image G33 as shown in FIG. 42 (b). In the second pseudo-bonus data table, data is set that enables the execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set. If it continues, the data in the first order in the second pseudo-bonus data table becomes the reference target again.

When the first setting process (step S2611) of the bonus start effect or the second setting process (step S2612) of the bonus start effect is executed after the setting process of the final effect (step S2609) is executed, first, a pseudo is performed. After the effect indicating that the bonus state ST4 is started is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started.

In the normal staging control process, other processes other than the above-mentioned various processes are executed (step S2613). In other processes, a process for executing an effect different from each of the above effects is executed in the normal game state ST1.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a reel effect processing executed by the main MPU 72. As described above, the reel effect processing is executed in step S803 when it is determined in step S801 of the reel control processing (FIG. 20) that the current game is the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4. That is, the reel effect processing is executed at the start of the first game when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started.

In the reel effect processing, first, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74, the previous game is the final game of the transition waiting period and a big bonus as a pseudo bonus state ST4. Combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus as a result of the stoppage of the previous game even though it has been decided to shift to (specifically, "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) Is determined whether or not is stopped and displayed (step S2701). When "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag (step S2701: YES), the reel effect generation flag is cleared to "0" (step S2702).

After that, the reel effect processing is executed (step S2703). In the reel effect processing, after starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus on the main line ML (specifically, "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red" 7 ”Symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at the same time.

50 (a) to 50 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the reel effect. In the final game of the transition waiting period, the result is out of the lottery process (FIG. 16) and the reel effect is won in the reel effect lottery process (step S2304). Even in the situation where it is decided to shift to, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), a combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus on the subline SL1 (specifically, "red 7" symbol, "red 7" The combination of the symbol and the "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

After that, a new game is started. This new game is the start game of the pseudo bonus state ST4. When a new game is started, rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started as shown in FIG. 50 (b). The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (specifically, "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) is stopped on the main line ML. In the displayed state, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at the same time. As a result, the player is notified that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is not a regular bonus but a big bonus. In the situation where the reel effect is being executed, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are maintained in the invalid state.

Returning to the description of the reel effect processing (FIG. 49), when "1" is not set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2701: NO), or when the process of step S2703 is executed, rotation starts. The process is executed (step S2704). In the rotation start process, the same process as in step S802 in the reel control process (FIG. 20) is executed. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the previous game, and if not. Wait until the weight time elapses. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S207 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Notify the players and the like.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is notified using the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. 51 (a) shows a period in which one game is executed, FIG. 51 (b) shows a period in which "1" is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 51 (c) shows a pseudo. The period during which the transition game to the bonus state ST4 is being executed is shown, FIG. 51 (d) shows the period during which the pseudo bonus state ST4 is executed, and FIG. 51 (e) is the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66. 1 The stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. FIG. 51 (f) shows the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R in the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66. The period during which the notification (hereinafter referred to as middle → left → right notification) is executed is shown, and FIG. 51 (g) shows the period during which the reel effect is executed.

First, a case where the reel effect is not executed when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is missed in the final game of the transition waiting period in the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 which is a big bonus is decided will be described. do.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), a new game is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. The transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) executed at the start of the game, and the bonus type lottery process (step S2301) executed in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46 (a)) is big. The bonus is selected. Therefore, at the timing of t1, "1" is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 51 (b). However, in the reel effect lottery process executed in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46 (a)), the reel effect is not won.

After that, the game is repeatedly executed in the transition waiting period, and the transition game to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (c) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, that is, the transition waiting period. The final game of is executed. The lottery process for the winning combination in the game (FIG. 16) results in a loss. In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the big winning flag is set to "1", but as described above, the reel effect lottery process does not result in the reel effect winning, so the main RAM 74 "1" is not set in the reel effect generation flag of. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the middle → right → left notification is executed to enable the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus to be stopped and displayed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. Will be done. As already explained, in the notification of the middle → right → left, the notification indicating that the “red 7” symbol should be aimed at is also executed.

By performing the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notification, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, it is notified by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs, and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is notified by the stop result of. Then, at the timing of t5, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d).

In the situation where "1" is set in the big winning flag but "1" is not set in the reel effect generation flag, the lottery process of the winning combination in the final game of the transition waiting period (FIG. 16) is performed. When the index value IV = 16 is won, the notification of middle → left → right is executed. As already explained, in the notification of the middle → left → right, the notification indicating that the “red 7” symbol should be aimed at is also executed. Then, by performing the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notification, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. In addition, when an index value IV other than "16" is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the final game of the transition waiting period, either the middle → right → left notification or the middle → left → right notification Is not executed either.

Next, in the final game of the transition waiting period in the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is a big bonus, is decided, the reel effect is executed when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is missed. The case will be described.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), a new game is executed from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7. The transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) executed at the start of the game, and the bonus type lottery process (step S2301) executed in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46 (a)) is big. The bonus is selected. Therefore, at the timing of t6, “1” is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 51 (b). Further, by winning the reel effect in the reel effect lottery process executed in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46 (a)), "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74.

After that, the game is repeatedly executed in the transition waiting period, and the transition game to the pseudo bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (c) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, that is, the transition waiting period. The final game of is executed. The lottery process for the winning combination in the game (FIG. 16) results in a loss. In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), "1" is set in the big winning flag, and as described above, the reel effect is won in the reel effect lottery process, so that the reel effect of the main RAM 74 is achieved. "1" is set in the generation flag. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the middle → left → right notification is executed to enable the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus to be stopped and displayed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Will be done. As already explained, in the notification of the middle → left → right, the notification indicating that the “red 7” symbol should be aimed at is also executed. Then, by performing the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notification, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. As a result, the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is notified by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the regular bonus of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Notified by the stop result.

Then, at the timing of t10, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (d). In this case, since "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74, FIG. 51 extends from the timing of t10, which is the start timing of this game, to the timing of t11, which is the intermediate timing of this game. As shown in (g), the reel effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (c), the combination of the “red 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “BAR” symbol is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. The rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started from, and after the rotation is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus on the main line ML (specifically, The rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at the same time with the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol) stopped and displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 this time is not a regular bonus but a big bonus.

After that, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted, and after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are accelerated to a constant speed rotation, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated from the invalid state. Then, when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination is executed. After that, at the timing of t12, this game ends as shown in FIG. 51 (a).

In the situation where "1" is set in the big winning flag and "1" is set in the reel effect generation flag, the index value is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in the final game of the transition waiting period. When IV = 16 is won, the notification of middle → right → left is executed. As already explained, in the middle → right → left notification, the notification indicating that the “red 7” symbol should be aimed is also executed. Then, by performing the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notification, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. After that, when the first game in the pseudo bonus state ST4 is started, the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML as a reel effect. From the situation, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and after the rotation is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus on the subline SL1 (specifically, The rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at the same time with the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol) stopped and displayed.

<Advantageous gaming state>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the advantageous state processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. As described above, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in step S710, which is a process. Then, the advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2103 in the advantageous lottery processing (FIG. 40) at the start of the game.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of this game is "3" (step S2801). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2801: NO), the processing after step S2802 is not executed. As a result, even in the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, in the game in which the number of bets is "2", the processing in step S2802 or later is not executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S2801: YES), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2802). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2802: YES), the processes after step S2803 are not executed. As a result, even if "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state flag or AT state flag of the main RAM 74, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is set, the processing in step S2803 and subsequent steps is performed. It will not be executed.

When the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S2802: NO), the current state is determined by determining whether or not "1" is set in the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the gaming state of is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2803). When the current game state is not the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2803: NO), it means that the current game state is the AT state ST5, so that the AT state process at the start of the game is executed (step S2804). .. The processing for the AT state at the start of the game will be described later.

When the current gaming state is the pseudo bonus state ST4 (step S2803: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2803: YES). Step S2805). As already explained, the first ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of game executions in the second section SC2 measured by using the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the upper limit number of games. It is a flag. As already explained, the second ending flag has a high possibility that the limited total net increase of the game medium measured by using the total acquisition counter 74d will reach the upper limit net increase in the main MPU 72. It is a flag for identification. If "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S2805: YES), the processing after step S2806 is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the situation where the total net increase number with restrictions on the game medium is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number, in step S2806 or later. The process for deciding whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 will not be executed.

If "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S2805: NO), whether or not "1" is set in the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74. Is determined (step S2806). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition condition to the AT state ST5 has already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4. When "1" is already set in the AT transition confirmation flag (step S2806: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 has already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4 this time, so that step S2807 The process for deciding whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 in the subsequent steps is not executed.

When "1" is not set in the AT transition confirmation flag (step S2806: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. On condition that (step S2807: YES), the AT transition lottery process is executed (step S2808). In the AT transition lottery process, the AT transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to shift to the AT state ST5 after the end of the pseudo bonus state ST4 this time. It is decided by lottery whether or not to let it. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 12 is won. Has a 10% chance of winning the AT transition, a 40% chance of winning the AT transition if the index value IV = 13 is won, and a 30% chance of winning the index value IV = 14. There is a probability of winning the AT transition, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 20% probability of winning the AT transition. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the AT transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the AT transition is won (step S2809: YES), "1" is set in the AT transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2810). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2811). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, the effect indicating that the AT transition has been won is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Next, the pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. The pseudo-bonus process is executed in step S905 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Is executed after.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of this game is "3" (step S2901). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2901: NO), the processing after step S2902 is not executed. As a result, even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 53) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the CB state is CB. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the CB state is entered in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. ..

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2901: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2902). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2903). When the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2903: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the AT transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2904).

When "1" is set in the AT transition confirmation flag (step S2904: YES), it means that the transition condition to the AT state ST5 is satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4 this time. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2905). After that, information corresponding to "50", which is the initial number of continuous games in the AT state ST5, is set in the AT state counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2906). Further, "1" is set in the AT status flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2907). Then, an AT transition command indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2908). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 occurs is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the AT transition confirmation flag (step S2904: NO), the setting process of the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S2909). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST6, and when "1" is set in the end preparation state flag, the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Further, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2910). As described above, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already described in the end preparation state ST6, an affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, and if "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step). S1903: NO), after setting "1" to the end preparation completion flag, a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in this game ( FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), the process for terminating the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends ends.

After executing the process of step S2910, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S2911). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an AT state process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The AT state process at the start of the game is executed in step S2804 in the advantageous state process at the start of the game (FIG. 52) as described above.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3001). As already explained, the first ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of game executions in the second section SC2 measured by using the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the upper limit number of games. It is a flag. As already explained, the second ending flag has a high possibility that the limited total net increase of the game medium measured by using the total acquisition counter 74d will reach the upper limit net increase in the main MPU 72. It is a flag for identification. If "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S3001: YES), the processing after step S3002 is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the situation where the total net increase number with restrictions on the game medium is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number, in step S3002 or later. The process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 will not be executed.

When "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the addition period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the current state is the addition period in the AT state ST5 (step S3002). The addition period counter is a counter for specifying whether or not it is an addition period and the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period on the main MPU 72.

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S3002: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (Step S3003: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S3004). In the addition period transition lottery process, the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5 by using the addition period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to shift to the additional period in which is likely to occur. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 10% probability that the additional period will be transferred and the index value IV = 12 will be won. In that case, there is a 5% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and the index value IV = 14 is won. In that case, there is a 15% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 10% probability of winning the transition of the additional period. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition of the additional period. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the transition to the additional period is won (step S3005: YES), the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step S3006). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the additional period will continue is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. Specifically, the addition period will continue for 10 games, but in step S3006, 20 games, which is the number of games of the 10 games or more, is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 from becoming "0" in the middle of the addition period.

After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3007). The first addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition of the number of games has occurred at the time of transition to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the effect indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. do. After that, "1" is set in the additional winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3008). The additional winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transfer winning of the additional period has been achieved in the transfer lottery process (step S3004) of the additional period.

If the transfer lottery process for the additional period (step S3004) does not result in the transfer winning for the additional period (step S3005: NO), the first additional lottery process is executed (step S3009). In the first additional lottery process, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is increased by using the first additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to generate an additional addition. If the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 10% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 70% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 5% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 5% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 5% chance that 50 games will be selected, and an 85% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 20% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 20% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 40% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 15% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 15% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 15% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 55% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 10% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 20 games will be selected, a 10% chance that 50 games will be selected, and a 70% chance. There is a probability that it will be off. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of being additionally won. In addition, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), increases the expected value of the number of games to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When any one of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games is selected in the first additional lottery process (step S3009) and the additional game is won (step S3010: YES), the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step). S3011). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S3009) is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. After that, the second addition command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3012). The second addition command is for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the additional game was won in the first additional lottery process (step S3009) and the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S3009). It is a command, and the second addition command includes information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S3009). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second addition command, the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games has occurred is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When the value of the addition period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more and the addition period is (step S3002: YES), any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (Step S3013: YES), the loop lottery generation lottery process is executed (step S3014). The loop lottery is a state in which the additional lottery process for determining whether to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is repeatedly executed within the range of one game until the end condition is satisfied. Occurrence of loop lottery In the lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to generate a loop lottery by using the loop lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. .. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, the loop lottery will occur with a probability of 15%, and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If there is, there is a 10% chance that a loop lottery will occur, and if an index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 25% chance that a loop lottery will occur and the index value IV = 14 will be won. If there is, there is a 20% chance that the loop lottery will occur, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 15% chance that the loop lottery will occur. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning a loop lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

Occurrence of loop lottery When the winning is achieved (step S3015: YES), the process of adding the number of continuous games is executed (step S3016). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, 10 games are added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. After that, the loop lottery start command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S3017). The loop lottery start command is a command for causing the director MPU 92 to recognize that the loop lottery has been won. In addition, the loop lottery start command includes information on 10 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the loop lottery start command, the effect indicating that the loop lottery has started is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, "1" is set in the loop lottery flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3018). The loop lottery flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the loop lottery has occurred and won in the loop lottery occurrence lottery process.

In the case of an additional period (step S3002: YES), when any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is not won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game (step S3013: NO). ), Or when the loop lottery occurrence lottery process (step S3014) does not result in a loop lottery occurrence (step S3015: NO), the second additional lottery process is executed (step S3019). In the second additional lottery process, the number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is added to the number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 by using the second additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. The number of games is decided by lottery.

In the second additional lottery process (step S3019), when an index value IV other than the index value IV = 11 to 15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 80% and 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%. And there is a 10% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 50% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 25% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 25% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a 60% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 20% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 20% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 40% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 40% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 30% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 35% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 35% chance that 50 games will be selected. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 50% chance that 10 games will be selected, a 25% chance that 20 games will be selected, and a 25% chance that 50 games will be selected. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher expected value of the number of games to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

After that, the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step S3020). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games selected in the second additional lottery process (step S3019) is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. After that, the third addition command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3021). The third addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the number of additional games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S3019), and the third addition command includes the second addition lottery process (step S3019). ) Contains information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the third addition command, the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games has occurred is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an AT process executed by the main MPU 72. The AT process is executed in step S906 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the AT processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

First, by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of this game is "3" (step S3101). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S3101: NO), the processes after step S3102 are not executed. As a result, even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and the remaining additional period in the AT state ST5 remains. The number of continuous games is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the AT process (FIG. 55) itself is not executed, so even if the CB state is started in the middle of the AT state ST5, the CB state is used. The number of games executed is not treated as the number of games digested in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the game shifts to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state.

When the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S3101: YES), the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3102). After that, by determining whether or not the value of the addition period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the current state is the addition period (step S3103).

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S3103: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the addition winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3104). At the start of this game, if the transfer winning of the additional period is achieved in the transfer lottery process (step S3004) of the additional period, "1" is set in the additional winning flag.

When "1" is set in the addition winning flag (step S3104: YES), the addition period setting process is executed (step S3105). In the addition period setting process, a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games of the addition period, is set in the addition period counter of the main RAM 74. Then, after clearing the additional winning flag "0" (step S3106), the start command of the additional period is transmitted to the effector MPU 92 (step S3107). The start command of the addition period is a command for causing the staging side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition period has been started. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the command to start the addition period, the effect indicating that the addition period has started and the effect indicating that the addition period has started are executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To do so.

When the value of the addition period counter is 1 or more and it is the addition period (step S3103: YES), the value of the addition period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3108). Then, when the value of the addition period counter after the subtraction becomes "0" (step S3109: YES), the end command of the addition period is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S3110). The end command of the addition period is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize that the addition period has ended. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the command to end the addition period, the effect indicating that the addition period has ended is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When a negative determination is made in step S3104, when the process of step S3107 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3109, or when the process of step S3110 is executed, the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". (Step S3111). When the value of the AT continuation counter is "0" (step S3111: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S3112).

When "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S3112: NO), the AT status flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3113). After that, the lottery process for the number of released games is executed (step S3114). As already explained, the number of released games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won in the transition lottery process (step S2112). It is a counter for specifying by MPU72. In the lottery process for the number of released games, first, the lottery table for the number of released games stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Then, the number of released games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter with the lottery table of the number of released games. In this case, as the number of released games, any one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games and 800 games is selected. Moreover, the selection probability of each of these release games is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the number of released games with a large number of games is selected may be high, and the probability that the number of released games with a small number of games is selected is set high. It may be configured as such. After executing the lottery process for the number of released games, the number of released games selected in the lottery process for the number of released games is set in the released game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3115). The release game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the remaining number of release games on the main MPU 72.

After that, the AT end command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S3116). The AT end command is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed. It controls the device 63.

When "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S3112: YES), the setting process of the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S3117). In the setting process, the AT status flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST6, and when "1" is set in the end preparation state flag, the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. After that, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3118). As described above, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already described in the end preparation state ST6, an affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section, and if "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step). S1903: NO), after setting "1" to the end preparation completion flag, a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in this game ( FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S1903: YES), the process for terminating the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

After that, the AT end command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S3119). The AT end command is a command for causing the effecting side MPU 92 to recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended is executed. It controls the device 63.

<Regarding the execution control of the effect in the AT state ST5>
Next, the content of the execution control of the effect in the AT state ST5 will be described. FIG. 56A is an explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups 101 to 104 provided in the effect side ROM 93.

In the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, the base effect corresponding to the current gaming situation is basically executed. When an execution trigger of an additional effect occurs in a situation where the base effect is being executed, an additional effect corresponding to the execution trigger is added to the base effect.

The base effect is a base effect for the AT state ST5 that is executed in the game situation that is the AT state ST5 and is not the addition period and the ending period, and an addition that is executed in the game situation that is the AT state ST5 and is the addition period. A base effect for the period and a base effect for the ending period executed in the gaming situation which is the AT state ST5 and is the ending period are set. In the base effect in the image display device 63, the character corresponding to the game situation is displayed in front of the background image of the type corresponding to each game situation, and the display mode of the background image and the character corresponds to the game situation. A video display that changes according to a series of stories is performed.

The additional effects include an effect corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), and an effect executed to notify the number of additional games when the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is added. An effect executed to notify that the loop lottery has started when the loop lottery has started during the addition period, and a notification that the loop lottery has ended when the loop lottery ends during the addition period. The effects to be executed for this purpose are set. When an additional effect occurs in a situation where the base effect is being executed, the upper lamp 61 interrupts the light emission pattern corresponding to the base effect to execute the light emission pattern corresponding to the additional effect, and the speaker 62 corresponds to the base effect. The sound output corresponding to the additional effect is executed on top of the sound output to be performed, and the image display device 63 displays the image corresponding to the additional effect in front of a part of the range of the image corresponding to the base effect.

The production side ROM 93 stores in advance the AT data table group 101, the additional period data table group 102, the ending data table group 103, and the game data table group 104 as various table groups 101 to 104. ing. The AT data table group 101 includes a plurality of types of AT data tables. That is, a plurality of types of base effects for the AT state ST5 are set, and when the AT state ST5 is started, the type of the AT data table to be referred to is determined, and the determined type of AT data table is determined. The base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the above will be executed.

FIG. 57A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base effect for the AT state ST5. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the base effect for the AT state ST5, the video of the first base image G51 is displayed by the seaside scenery and the first base character image, and a plurality of types of first effects are displayed in front of the image. The moving image of the image G52 is displayed. The image data for displaying the first base image G51 and the first effect image G52 as moving images is set in the AT data table.

In the base effect for the AT state ST5, when it is not the ending period, the remaining game number display image G53 for notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed. The number of remaining games display image G53 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the effect side grasping counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The production side grasp counter is a counter for grasping the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 by the production side MPU 92. Image data for displaying an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G53 is set in the AT data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the numerical part corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed in the remaining game number display image G53. To. For the image of the numerical value corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G53, the image data corresponding to the value of the production side grasp counter of the production side RAM 94 is read from the production side ROM 93. By being used, it is displayed on the image display device 63. In the ending period, the remaining game number display image G53 is not displayed.

In the base effect for the AT state ST5, the acquired number display image G54 for notifying the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 is displayed. The acquired number display image G54 displays the number of game media corresponding to the value of the acquired number grasping counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The acquisition number grasping counter is a counter for grasping the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 on the production side MPU 92, and a new game not based on the establishment of the replay prize is started in the AT state ST5. In this case, the number of game media used to start the game based on the command received from the main MPU 72 is subtracted from the acquired number grasping counter, and the game medium is given to the player in the AT state ST5. Is added to the acquisition number grasping counter based on the command received from the main MPU 72. Image data for displaying an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 in the acquired number display image G54 is set in the AT data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the acquired number display image G54 is displayed. For the image of the numerical value corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the acquired number display image G54, the image data corresponding to the value of the acquired number grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and used. This is displayed on the image display device 63.

The additional period data table group 102 includes a plurality of types of additional period data tables. In other words, multiple types of base effects for the additional period are set, and when the additional period starts, the type of the additional period data table to be referred to is determined, and the determined type of additional period data table is determined. The base effect for the additional period corresponding to the above will be executed.

FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base effect for the additional period. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the base effect for the additional period, the second base image G61 is displayed as a moving image with the same color background and the second base character image, and a plurality of types of second effect images are displayed in front of the second base image G61. The moving image of G62 is displayed. The image data for displaying the second base image G61 and the second staging image G62 as moving images is set in the data table for the additional period.

In the base effect for the additional period, the remaining game number display image G63 for notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed. The number of remaining games display image G63 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the effect side grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94. The image data for displaying an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G63 is set in the data table for the additional period. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the numerical part corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed in the remaining game number display image G63. To. For the image of the numerical value corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G63, the image data corresponding to the value of the production side grasp counter of the production side RAM 94 is read from the production side ROM 93. By being used, it is displayed on the image display device 63.

In the base effect for the additional period, the acquired number display image G64 for notifying the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 is displayed. The acquired number display image G64 displays the number of game media corresponding to the value of the acquired number grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94. Image data for displaying an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 in the acquired number display image G64 is set in the data table for the addition period. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the acquired number display image G64 is displayed. For the image of the numerical value corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the acquired number display image G64, the image data corresponding to the value of the acquired number grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and used. This is displayed on the image display device 63.

In the base effect for the additional period, the additional period game number display image G65 for notifying the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period is displayed. The number of games displayed in the additional period display image G65 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the additional period grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94. The addition period grasping counter is a counter for grasping the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period by the production side MPU 92, and when the addition period is started, the addition period is based on the command received from the main side MPU 72. The value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, is added to the addition period grasping counter, and is received from the main MPU 72 every time a game in the non-CB state and the bet number is "3" is executed in the addition period. The value of the additional period grasp counter is decremented by 1 based on the command. In the addition period game number display image G65, image data for displaying an image other than the image of the numerical portion corresponding to the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period is set in the data table for the addition period. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the numerical part corresponding to the number of continuous games remaining in the additional period is displayed in the additional period game number display image G65. To. For the image of the numerical value corresponding to the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period in the addition period game number display image G65, the image data corresponding to the value of the addition period grasping counter of the production side RAM 94 is read from the production side ROM 93. By being used, it is displayed on the image display device 63.

The ending data table group 103 includes a plurality of types of ending data tables. That is, multiple types of base effects for the ending period are set, and when the ending period starts, the type of the ending data table to be referred to is determined, and the base effect for the determined type of ending period is determined. Will be executed. The game data table group 104 includes a plurality of types of game data tables. That is, a plurality of types of additional effects are set, and when an opportunity to execute the additional effect occurs, the game data table corresponding to the execution opportunity is selected, and the selected type of additional effect is executed. Will be.

FIG. 56B is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 111 to 113 of the effect side RAM 94 for reading the data table.

The effect side RAM 94 is provided with a first control area 111, a second control area 112, and a third control area 113. In the first control area 111, the AT data table that is the reference target in the AT data table group 101 in the AT state ST5 is read out. In the second control area 112, the data table for the additional period that was the reference target in the data table group 102 for the additional period is read out if it is the additional period, and if it is the ending period, the data table group 103 for the ending period is read out. The ending data table to be referred to is read out. In the third control area 113, the game data table that is the reference target in the game data table group 104 is read out.

In the case of the addition period, the data table for the addition period is read out in the second control area 112 in the situation where the AT data table is read in the first control area 111. Further, when the ending period is reached, the ending data table is read out to the second control area 112 while the AT data table is read out to the first control area 111. The second control area 112 is set to have a higher priority of the reference target than the first control area 111. Therefore, during the addition period, the execution control of the base effect is performed according to the data table for the addition period read out to the second control area 112, and the base effect according to the AT data table read out to the first control area 111. Execution control is not performed. When the addition period ends and the data table for the addition period is deleted from the second control area 112, the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 becomes the same as before the addition period starts. The execution control of the corresponding base effect is executed. Further, during the ending period, the execution control of the base effect is performed according to the ending data table read out in the second control area 112, and the base effect according to the AT data table read out in the first control area 111 is performed. Execution control is not performed.

The third control area 113 is set as an additional area with respect to the first control area 111 and the second control area 112. In the game situation in which the AT state is ST5 and neither the addition period nor the ending period is performed, the base effect according to the AT data table read out in the first control area 111 is read out in the third control area 113. The effect according to the created game data table is added. In the case of the addition period, the effect according to the game data table read out to the third control area 113 is compared with the base effect according to the addition period data table read out to the second control area 112. Will be added. In the case of the ending period, the effect according to the game data table read out to the third control area 113 is added to the base effect according to the ending data table read out to the second control area 112. Will be done.

In addition to the various table groups 101 to 104, the effect side ROM 93 stores a plurality of types of normal data tables referred to for executing and controlling the base effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. A group and a pseudo-bonus data table group in which a plurality of types of pseudo-bonus data tables referred to for executing and controlling the base effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are stored are stored in advance. When the normal game state ST1 is set, the normal data table selected as a reference target from the normal game state ST1 is read out to the first control area 111, and when the pseudo bonus state ST4 is set, the pseudo bonus data table is read. The pseudo-bonus data table selected as a reference target from the group is read out to the first control area 111. Further, even in the normal game state ST1 and the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the execution trigger of the additional effect occurs, the game data table corresponding to the current execution trigger of the game data table group 104 is controlled by the third control. It is read out to the area 113, and an additional effect corresponding to the game data table is added to the base effect.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the data structure of the AT data table. Although the specific contents of the data are different, the basic data structure is the same even for the additional period data table, the ending data table, and the game data table.

A plurality of pointer information is set in the AT data table so as to be serial numbers, and the image data and the speaker 62, which are data for displaying an image on the image display device 63 in correspondence with each pointer information. A combination of audio data, which is data for outputting sound from, and light emission data, which is data for causing the upper lamp 61 to emit light, is set. When the AT data table is the reference target, the execution control of the effect is performed based on the combination of the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the pointer information in the first order. After that, the pointer information to be referred to is updated to be the pointer information in the order after the update every time the update timing of the effect is reached, and the image data set corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to after the update. , The execution control of the effect is performed based on the combination of the voice data and the light emission data. Finally, the execution control of the effect is performed based on the combination of the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the pointer information in the final order.

In the case of the AT data table, the AT state ST5 is still continued when the execution control of the effect is performed based on the combination of the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the pointer information in the last order. If so, the pointer information to be referenced returns to the pointer information in the first order. As a result, when the gaming situation in which the AT state is ST5 and neither the addition period nor the ending period continues, the series of effects set in the AT data table is repeated. This is the same even in the case of the data table for the additional period and the data table for the game.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

When the AT transition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3201: YES), the selection process of the AT data table is executed (step S3202). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of AT data tables included in the AT data table group 101 of the effect side ROM 93, the AT data table to be referred to in the current AT state ST5 is determined by lottery. At the time of this lottery, a reference target determination table stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of the plurality of types of AT data tables are the same.

After that, the AT data table of the type selected in step S3202 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the first control area 111 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3203). In this case, after clearing "0" in the first control area 111, the AT data table of the type read this time is stored in the first control area 111. By storing the AT data table in the first control area 111, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the AT data table, and the base effect of the AT state ST5 is executed.

After that, information corresponding to 50 games, which is the initial number of continuous games in the AT state ST5, is set in the effect side grasping counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3204). The production side grasp counter is a counter for grasping the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 by the production side MPU 92. In the AT state ST5, the number of games corresponding to the information stored in the effect side grasp counter is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the AT state ST5, the value of the effect side grasping counter is decremented by 1, and the rest of the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 accordingly. The number of continuous games is also subtracted by 1.

When a negative determination is made in step S3201 or when the process of step S3204 is executed, if it is not the addition period (step S3205: NO), it is a condition that the start command of the addition period is received from the main MPU 72. (Step S3206: YES), the selection process of the data table for the addition period is executed (step S3207). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of additional period data tables included in the additional period data table group 102 on the effect side ROM 93, the additional period data table to be referred to in the current additional period is determined by lottery. At the time of this lottery, a reference target determination table stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of each of the multiple types of data tables for the additional period are the same.

After that, the data table for the addition period of the type selected in step S3207 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3208). In this case, after clearing "0" in the second control area 112, the data table for the addition period of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112. By storing the additional period data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the additional period data table, and the base effect for the additional period is executed.

In the case of the addition period (step S3205: YES), the second control area 112 of the staging side RAM 94 is set to "0" on condition that the end command of the addition period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3209: YES). Clear (step S3210). When the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the execution control of the effect according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is restarted, and the base effect of the AT state ST5 is executed. .. After that, "1" is set in the addition period end flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3211). The addition period end flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to grasp that the situation is after the addition period has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S3206, when the process of step S3208 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3209, or when the process of step S3211 is executed, the first to third addition commands are executed from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not any of the above is received (step S3212). The first addition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the addition of the number of games has occurred at the time of transition to the addition period as already explained, and the second addition command is the first addition lottery as already explained. The third addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the additional game was won in the process (step S3009) and the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S3009). This is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the number of additional games selected in the second additional lottery process (step S3019).

When any of the first to third addition commands is received (step S3212: YES), the game data table selection process is executed (step S3213). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the production side ROM 93, the type of game data table corresponding to the type of the addition command received this time and the number of additional games is selected. .. Then, the selected type of game data table is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3214). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the game data table of the type read this time is stored in the third control area 113. By storing the game data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table, and this time, the base effect for the AT state ST5 or the base effect for the additional period is controlled. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of games included in the received addition command (that is, the number of additional games generated this time) has been added.

After that, the information corresponding to the number of additional games set in the addition command received this time is added to the effect side grasp counter of the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 is increased by the number of additional games set in the addition command received this time.

When a negative determination is made in step S3212 or the process of step S3215 is executed, the loop addition effect process is executed in step S3216, the irregular process is executed in step S3217, and the ending process is executed in step S3218. Is executed, and other processing is executed in step S3219. The processing of steps S3216 to S3218 will be described later. In the other processes of step S3219, the execution control of the effects other than the above-mentioned various effects in the AT state ST5 is performed.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a task process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The task processing is repeatedly executed by the staging side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 6 milliseconds).

When any kind of data table is stored in the third control area 113 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3301: YES), the pointer update process of the third control area 113 is executed (step S3302). In the pointer update process of the third control area 113, a process for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read out in the third control area 113 is executed. Specifically, immediately after the game data table is stored in the third control area 113, the pointer information in the first order in the game data table is set as the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the game data table stored in the third control area 113, the pointer information in the following order should be newly referred to with respect to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the end trigger of the reference target of the data table stored in the third control area 113 has occurred (step S3303). Specifically, when the data table stored in the third control area 113 is a data table other than the progress / stopped data table described later, the pointer information to be referred to is stored in the third control area 113. Judges whether the pointer information of the last order in the data table has been exceeded. When the pointer information to be referred to exceeds the pointer information of the last order in the game data table stored in the third control area 113 (step S3303: YES), the third control area 113 of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "0". Clear (step S3304). As a result, the execution control of the effect according to the game data table previously stored in the third control area 113 is terminated.

When the data table stored in the third control area 113 is the progress / stop data table described later, the pointer information to be referred to is the last in the progress / stop data table stored in the third control area 113. Even if the pointer information of the order is exceeded, the progress / stopped data table is not deleted from the third control area 113 and is stored and held in the third control area 113. In this case, the pointer information to be referred to is updated to the pointer information in the first order. When the progress / stop data table is stored in the third control area 113, the process of step S3709 is executed in the irregular process (FIG. 67) described later, so that the progress / stop data table is controlled by the third control. It is erased from the area 113.

When a negative determination is made in step S3301, a negative determination is made in step S3303, or the process of step S3304 is executed, any kind of data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3305). As described above, in the second control area 112, the additional period data table included in the additional period data table group 102 of the effect side ROM 93 or the ending data table included in the ending data table group 103 of the effect side ROM 93 is read out. Is done.

When any kind of data table is stored in the second control area 112 (step S3305: YES), the pointer update process of the second control area 112 is executed (step S3306). Although the details of the pointer update process of the second control area 112 will be described later, a process for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read in the second control area 112 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3305, or when the process of step S3306 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the update waiting flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3307). In the update wait flag, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table read into the first control area 111 of the effect side RAM 94 during the addition period or the ending period in the AT state ST5 is the last order in the AT data table. This is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the situation is set again in the pointer information of the first order by reaching the pointer information of.

When "1" is not set in the update wait flag (step S3307: NO), the pointer update process of the first control area 111 is executed (step S3308). In the pointer update process of the first control area 111, a process for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read in the first control area 111 is executed. Specifically, when the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the first order in the AT data table immediately after the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111. Set the pointer information of to the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111, the pointer information in the following order should be newly referred to with respect to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the first control area 111 exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the data table (step S3309). When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the AT data table. .. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3309, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the first control area 111 is set to the pointer information in the first order in the data table (step S3310). When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is set as the pointer information in the first order in the AT data table.

After that, it is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the second control area 112 (step S3311). Specifically, regarding the AT state ST5, it is determined whether or not the additional period data table or the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 of the effect side RAM 94 during the addition period or ending period in the AT state ST5 is the AT data. By reaching the pointer information of the last order in the table, it means that the situation is set again in the pointer information of the first order. In this case, "1" is set in the update waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3312).

When "1" is set in the update waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3307: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the addition period end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3313). .. As already explained, the addition period end flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to grasp that the situation is after the addition period has ended, and is added when the addition period end command is received from the main side MPU 72. "1" is set in the period end flag.

When "1" is set in the addition period end flag (step S3313: YES), the update waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3314), and the addition period end flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "0". "0" is cleared (step S3315). When the update wait flag is cleared to "0", the state of waiting for the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is released. In addition, even in the ending period, there may be a situation where "1" is set in the update waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94, but when the ending period ends, the AT state ST5 also ends, so that it is in the middle of the ending period. The update wait flag is not cleared by "0", and the update wait flag is cleared by "0" when the ending period ends, that is, when the AT state ST5 ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S3309, when a negative determination is made in step S3311, when the process of step S3312 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3313, or when the process of step S3315 is executed, the first 2 It is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the control area 112 (step S3316). Specifically, regarding the AT state ST5, it is determined whether or not the additional period data table or the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112.

If a negative determination is made in step S3316, the data setting process from the first control area 111 is executed (step S3317). In the data setting process from the first control area 111, in the data table stored in the first control area 111, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the image data, audio data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table are read out. .. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the AT state ST5 corresponding to various data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Will be done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3316, the data setting process from the second control area 112 is executed (step S3318). In the data setting process from the second control area 112, in the data table stored in the second control area 112, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the image data, audio data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table are stored. Is read. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 provide the base effect for the addition period corresponding to various data set in the data table for the addition period corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to at present. It will be executed. When the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the image data, audio data, and light emission data set in the ending data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are obtained. Is read. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the ending period corresponding to various data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Will be.

When the process of step S3317 is executed or the process of step S3318 is executed, it is determined whether or not any game data table is stored in the third control area 113 (step S3319). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3319, the data setting process from the third control area 113 is executed (step S3320). In the data setting process from the third control area 113, in the data table stored in the third control area 113, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed and read out so that the image corresponding to the read image data is added to the image of the base effect corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111 or the second control area 112. The sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed so that the sound output corresponding to the audio data is superimposed on the sound output of the base effect corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111 or the second control area 112, and the read light emission is performed. The light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed so that the light emission pattern corresponding to the data is executed by interrupting the light emission pattern of the base effect.

Next, a state in which the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the first control area 111 and the second control area 112 is updated in the AT state ST5 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 61 (a) shows a situation in which the AT state is ST5, FIG. 61 (b) shows a situation in which it is an additional period, and FIG. 61 (c) should be referred to in the data table stored in the first control area 111. The period in which the pointer information is updated is shown, and FIG. 61 (d) shows the period in which the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated.

At the timing of t1, the AT state ST5 is started as shown in FIG. 61 (a). At the timing of t1, the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111 of the effect side RAM 94, and as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is started. At, the base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the AT data table is started. After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 61 (c). As a result, the base effect for the AT state ST5 will proceed. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table becomes the pointer information in the last order, and the pointer information to be referred to is further updated, so that the reference should be made. The pointer information becomes the pointer information in the first order in the AT data table. That is, when one lap of the base effect for the AT state ST5 defined in the AT data table is completed, a new lap of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is started. In this case, since the AT data table to be referred to is the same in each lap, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is also the same.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the base effect for the AT state ST5 proceeds. Then, at the timing of t3, the addition period is started as shown in FIG. 61 (b). At the timing of t3, the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94, and as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table is started. As a result, the base effect for the additional period corresponding to the data table for the additional period is started.

As described above, when the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, even if the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, it is referred to when the execution control of the base effect is performed. The data table to be used is a data table for an additional period stored in the second control area 112, and the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is not a reference target. However, it is an additional period until the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 reaches the pointer information of the last order and is updated to the pointer information of the first order. Therefore, even if the AT data table is not referenced, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continuously updated. Therefore, the addition period is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 61 (b), but even after the timing of t3, it is stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 61 (d). Not only is the pointer information to be referred to in the added period data table updated, but also the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 as shown in FIG. 61 (c). Will be updated.

Then, at the timing of t4, the addition period ends as shown in FIG. 61 (b). When the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" at the timing of t4, the data table for the additional period is no longer a reference target. Therefore, the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 at the start of the AT state ST5 this time becomes the reference target again, and the base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the AT data table is restarted.

As described above, even if the AT data table in the first control area 111 is not the reference target due to the additional period, the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is continued. Therefore, when the addition period ends and the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 that was executed immediately before the start of the addition period is not restarted. The base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the content at the time when the addition period has progressed for the period during which the addition period was executed, as opposed to the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 that was executed immediately before the addition period started. To. As a result, it is possible to restart the base effect for the AT state ST5 in a state where the progress of the base effect for the AT state ST5 reflects the elapse of the period in which the addition period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effect content to be executed when the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 61 (c). As a result, the base effect for the AT state ST5 will proceed. After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table becomes the pointer information in the last order, and the pointer information to be referred to is further updated, so that the reference should be made. The pointer information becomes the pointer information in the first order in the AT data table. That is, when one lap of the base effect for the AT state ST5 defined in the AT data table is completed, a new lap of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is started. In this case, since the AT data table to be referred to is the same in each lap, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is also the same.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 61 (c), and the base effect for the AT state ST5 proceeds. Then, at the timing of t6, the addition period is started as shown in FIG. 61 (b). At the timing of t6, the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94, and as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table is started. As a result, the base effect for the additional period corresponding to the data table for the additional period is started.

As described above, when the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, even if the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, it is referred to when the execution control of the base effect is performed. The data table to be used is a data table for an additional period stored in the second control area 112, and the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is not a reference target. However, it is an additional period until the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 reaches the pointer information of the last order and is updated to the pointer information of the first order. Therefore, even if the AT data table is not referenced, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continuously updated. Therefore, the addition period is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 61 (b), but even after the timing of t6, it is stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 61 (d). Not only is the pointer information to be referred to in the added period data table updated, but also the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 as shown in FIG. 61 (c). Will be updated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table becomes the pointer information in the last order at the timing of t7 in the middle of the addition period, and the pointer information to be further referred to is updated. Therefore, the pointer information to be referred to becomes the pointer information in the first order in the AT data table. However, since the current state is the addition period as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table of the first control area 111 is not updated after the timing of t7. That is, it is an additional period until the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 reaches the last-order pointer information and is updated to the first-order pointer information. Even if the AT data table is not referenced, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continuously updated, whereas the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is the last in the addition period. When the pointer information of the order is reached and updated to the pointer information of the first order, the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is awaited in the situation where the addition period continues. As a result, it is possible to prevent the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table that is not the reference target from being continuously continued in the situation where the addition period is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is sequentially updated from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, and is used for the additional period. The base production will proceed. From the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is not updated.

Then, at the timing of t8, the addition period ends as shown in FIG. 61 (b). When the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" at the timing of t8, the data table for the additional period is no longer a reference target. Therefore, the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 at the start of the AT state ST5 this time becomes the reference target again, and the base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the AT data table is restarted. In this case, since the update is stopped in the situation where the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 at the timing of t7 is the pointer information in the first order, the update is stopped at the timing of t8. The base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the effect content corresponding to the pointer information in the first order in the AT data table. That is, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect content. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect content when the addition period ends.

<About loop lottery processing>
Next, the loop lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. The loop lottery process is executed by winning the event in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) during the addition period of the AT state ST5. As already explained, the loop lottery is to repeatedly execute the additional lottery process for determining whether to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 within the range of one game until the end condition is satisfied. be. The loop lottery process is executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the loop lottery process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the loop lottery flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3401). As described above, the loop lottery flag is set to "1" by winning the occurrence in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) during the addition period of the AT state ST5. If "1" is not set in the loop lottery flag (step S3401: NO), the loop lottery process ends as it is.

When "1" is set in the loop lottery flag (step S3401: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3402). .. The completion flag of the loop lottery indicates to the main MPU 72 whether or not the execution of the additional lottery process (step S3411) triggered by the occurrence of the loop lottery occurrence lottery process (step S3014) is completed. It is a flag to identify. Occurrence of loop lottery At the timing of winning in the lottery process (step S3014), the value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0", and the occurrence of the loop lottery is won in the lottery process (step S3014). When the execution of the addition lottery process (step S3411) is completed, that is, when the addition lottery process (step S3411) does not result in the addition winning, or when the addition lottery process (step S3411) is performed. When the number of executions reaches the end reference number, "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag. When "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag (step S3402: YES), it is not necessary to execute the addition lottery process (step S3411), so the process jumps to the loop addition process in step S3416.

When "1" is not set in the loop lottery completion flag (step S3402: NO), the process of acquiring the second random number used when executing the additional lottery process (step S3411) in steps S3403 to S3408 (step S3401). A process for generating a specific waiting period is executed before step S3410).

In the loop lottery process (FIG. 62), the acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 may be repeated. The second random number is 1-byte numerical information consisting of 8 bits. The second random number circuit 76 sequentially updates the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and when the update of the second random number goes around once, a new initial stage is obtained. The update of the next round of the second random number is started from the value. The loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started, and the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62). Is executed once. Since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started in a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is performed between the acquisition of the second random number once and the acquisition of the second random number. A waiting period for the startup cycle occurs. That is, since the predetermined waiting period is secured by the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), it is not necessary to execute the process for securing the predetermined wait period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62). .. The start cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), 1.49 milliseconds, is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to make one round of updating the second random number.

In the process (step S3403 to step S3408) for generating a specific waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62), first, the repetition number “15” is set in the repetition number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3403 to step S3408). Step S3403). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 62), the acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 may be repeated as described above. Then, when the second random number is repeatedly acquired, the predetermined waiting period (timer interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)) is set as a fixed period from the acquisition of the second random number once to the acquisition of the second random number. ) Is not only secured, but also a specific waiting period is secured as a period of fluctuation. Even if the maximum value of this specific waiting period is reached, it is less than or equal to a predetermined waiting period, and more specifically, it is shorter than a predetermined waiting period.

After that, the second random number acquired in the previous step S3410 is read from the second random number acquisition area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3404). After the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number whose value is "0" in decimal is generated in the second random number acquisition area. It will be stored. After that, the lower 4 bits of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3404 are stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a variation value (step S3405). In this case, since the variation value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "15".

After that, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3406). If the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition counter (step S3406: YES), the process proceeds to step S3407 by the JUMP instruction, and if the variation value is greater than or equal to the value of the repetition counter (step S3406: NO). ), The NOP instruction proceeds to the process of step S3407. In step S3407, the value of the repetition counter is subtracted by 1. Then, if the value of the repeat count counter after 1 subtraction is 1 or more (step S3408: NO), the process returns to the process of step S3406, and if the value of the repeat count counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3408). : YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3407 regardless of whether the affirmative judgment is made in step S3406 or the negative judgment is made in step S3406, but the JUMP instruction is more than the case where the NOP instruction is executed. Is executed, the processing time required to proceed to the processing of step S3407 is longer by about 10 microseconds. Then, as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed and the NOP instruction is executed depending on whether or not the variation value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number acquired last time is smaller than the value of the repetition counter. There are cases where it is done. Further, each time the process of step S3407 is executed, the value of the repeat count counter is subtracted by 1, and the processes of steps S3406 and S3407 are repeated until the value of the repeat count counter after 1 subtraction becomes “0”. As a result, the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time as the ratio between the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3406 and the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3406 out of the 15 repetition times. As a result, it becomes possible to change a specific waiting period.

In step S3409, the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The lottery execution counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed in the current game by the main MPU 72.

After that, the second random number at that time is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number acquisition area of the main RAM 74 (step S3410). After that, the addition lottery process is executed (step S3411). In the addition lottery process, the addition lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read out, and the second random number is collated with the read-out addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. Determine if it matches the numerical information. Only one additional lottery table is provided, and the above-mentioned winning numerical information is set so that the probability of winning the additional winning in the additional lottery process is 90%. Here, the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game does not affect the additional lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the additional lottery table is used as the role lottery process (FIG. 16). ) May be set according to the type of index value IV that can be won, so that the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in this game affects the additional lottery process.

When the addition winning is not achieved in the addition lottery process (step S3411) (step S3412: NO), after setting "1" in the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3415), for the loop in step S3416. Execute the addition process. This ends the loop lottery process in this game. The loop lottery completion flag is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

When the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) (step S3412: YES), the value of the loop addition counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3413). The loop addition counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411).

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 has reached the end reference number "1000" (step S3414). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 62), the maximum number of games that can be added as the number of additional games is 1000 games, and the maximum number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3411) is 1000 times. When the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "1000" (step S3414: YES), it means that the number of additional lottery processes (step S3411) executed in this game has reached the maximum value of 1000 times. Therefore, after setting "1" in the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3415), the loop addition process of step S3416 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the lottery execution counter has not reached "1000" (step S3414: YES), the loop addition process of step S3416 is executed without setting "1" to the loop lottery completion flag.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a loop addition process executed in step S3416 of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62).

When the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to any of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated and a stop command is generated (step S3501: YES), the value of the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. On condition that there is (step S3502: YES), the addition process of the AT continuation counter is executed (step S3503). In the AT continuation counter addition process, the value of the loop addition counter is added to the value of the AT continuation counter. As already explained, the AT continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 by the main MPU 72, and the loop addition counter is an addition winning in the addition lottery process (step S3411) as already explained. This is a counter for specifying the number of times that the value has been reached by the main MPU 72. That is, when the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed, the addition is performed from the start of this game to the occurrence of the first stop command, triggered by the occurrence of the first stop command. The number of games corresponding to the number of additional winnings in the lottery process (step S3411) is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5, and the previous stop is triggered by the occurrence of the second and subsequent stop commands. The number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) from the occurrence of the command to the occurrence of the current stop command is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5.

After that, the loop addition command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3504). The loop addition command includes information corresponding to the value stored in the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74. The details will be described later, but when the effect side MPU 92 receives the loop addition command, the effect indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is added due to the execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is above. It is executed by the lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the value of the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3505).

When a negative determination is made in step S3502 or when the process of step S3505 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3506). As already explained, the completion flag of the loop lottery indicates whether or not the execution of the additional lottery process (step S3411) triggered by the occurrence of the loop lottery occurrence lottery process (step S3014) is completed. This is a flag to be specified by the main MPU 72. Occurrence of loop lottery At the timing when the lottery is generated in the lottery process (step S3014), the value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0", and the addition lottery process (step S3411) does not result in the addition winning. If the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3411) reaches the end reference number, "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag.

When "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag (step S3506: YES), the loop lottery completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S3507). Further, the loop lottery flag is cleared to "0" (step S3508). After that, the loop lottery end command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S3509). Although the details will be described later, when the production side MPU 92 receives the loop lottery end command, it indicates that the loop lottery executed with the occurrence winning in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) has ended. The effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a loop addition effect process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The loop addition effect process is executed in another process (step S3219) in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 59).

First, it is determined whether or not a loop lottery start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3601). As described above, the loop lottery start command is a command transmitted by being won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) executed by the main MPU 72 during the addition period.

When the loop lottery start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3601: YES), the game data table selection process is executed (step S3602). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the loop lottery start command received this time is selected from the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected type of game data table is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3603). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the game data table of the type read this time is stored in the third control area 113. By storing the game data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table, and the loop lottery is started for the base effect for the additional period. An additional effect shown and an additional effect indicating that 10 games have been added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 are added.

After that, the information corresponding to the 10 games added this time is added to the effect side grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 increases by "10".

When a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a loop addition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3605). As already explained, the loop addition command is a command transmitted when a new stop command is generated for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the situation where the loop lottery is being performed on the main MPU72. .. In the loop addition command, if the loop addition command is a command transmitted when the first stop command in the current game occurs, the first stop after the start of the current game. Information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) before the command is generated is included as information on the number of additional games. Further, if the loop addition command is a command transmitted when the second and subsequent stop commands are generated, the stop this time is performed after the previous stop command is generated. Information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) before the command is generated is included as information on the number of additional games.

When the loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3605: YES), the game data table selection process is executed (step S3606). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the loop addition command received this time is selected from the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected type of game data table is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3607). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the game data table of the type read this time is stored in the third control area 113. By storing the game data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table, and the loop addition command received this time is used for the base effect for the additional period. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of included games (that is, the number of additional games generated this time) has been added.

After that, the information corresponding to the number of additional games set in the loop addition command received this time is added to the effect side grasp counter of the effect side RAM 94. As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 increases by the number of additional games set in the loop addition command received this time.

When a negative determination is made in step S3605 or when the process of step S3608 is executed, it is determined whether or not a loop lottery end command has been received from the main MPU 72. As already explained, the loop lottery end command is a command transmitted when the loop lottery executed when the loop lottery is generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) in the main MPU 72 is completed. be.

When the loop lottery end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3609: YES), the stop command command indicating that the stop command has been generated for the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotating in this game. Is determined from the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not it is the end timing of the current game (step S3610). The configuration for determining whether or not it is the end timing of this game is not limited to the above, and for example, it is determined whether or not a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the end timing of this game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3610, the game data table selection process is executed (step S3611). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is selected from the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected type of game data table is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3612).

In the third control area 113, a game data table corresponding to the loop addition command transmitted when a stop command is generated for the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game is stored. If so, the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is stored in the third control area 113 so as not to overwrite the game data table. In this case, the execution control of the effect is controlled according to the game data table corresponding to the loop addition command transmitted when the stop command is generated for the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. After that, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery. Therefore, it is included in the loop addition command transmitted when the stop command is generated for the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game for the base effect for the addition period. After the additional effect indicating that the number of existing games (that is, the number of additional games generated this time) has been added, an additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is added. On the other hand, in the third control area 113, there is a game data table corresponding to the loop addition command transmitted when the stop command is generated for the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. If it is not stored, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is stored in the third control area 113. In this case, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery, and an additional effect indicating that the loop lottery is completed is added to the base effect for the additional period.

When the loop lottery end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3609: YES) and it is not the end timing of the game (step S3610: NO), the end wait flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "". 1 ”is set (step S3613). The end wait flag is a situation in which the execution of the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is waiting until the stop command is issued to the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. Is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S3609, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3614). When "1" is set in the end wait flag (step S3614: YES), a stop command command indicating that a stop command has been generated for the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotating in this game is issued. By determining whether or not the game is received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the current game (step S3615).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3615, the game data table selection process is executed (step S3616). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is selected from the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected type of game data table is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3617). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is stored in the third control area 113. As a result, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery, and an additional effect indicating that the loop lottery is completed is added to the base effect for the additional period. After that, the end waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3618).

Next, a state in which the effect progresses when the loop lottery is executed on the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 65A shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 65B shows the timing at which the loop lottery is generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014). FIG. 65 (c) shows the period during which the additional effect indicating that the number of games has been added is being executed, and FIG. 65 (d) shows the timing at which the stop command is generated for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. 65 (e) shows the timing at which the loop addition command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, and FIG. 65 (f) shows the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery is completed. Indicates the period.

First, a case where the loop lottery is continued even after the stop command is generated for the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

At the timing of t1, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (a). The game is started during the addition period of the AT state ST5. Therefore, when the game is started, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the base effect for the additional period. In the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game, the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is executed by winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 15, and as shown in FIG. 65 (b). A loop lottery will occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has been started and the 10 games are in the AT state ST5 with respect to the base effect for the additional period. An additional effect is added to indicate that it has been added to the number of continuous games remaining in.

After that, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. As a result, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Since the addition is won in the addition lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) that is repeatedly executed until the stop command is generated, the information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition is won is added. The loop addition command included as the information on the number of games is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of t3. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time) for the base effect for the additional period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred) has been added.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the situation where the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. By being operated, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The number of times the additional winning was achieved because the additional winning was achieved in the additional lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) that was repeatedly executed from the previous stop command to the current stop command. The loop addition command including the information on the number of games corresponding to is added as the information on the number of games is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of t5. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time) for the base effect for the additional period from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred) has been added.

After that, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and operated in the situation where one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 65 (d). As a result, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The number of times the additional winning was achieved because the additional winning was achieved in the additional lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) that was repeatedly executed from the previous stop command to the current stop command. The loop addition command including the information on the number of games corresponding to is added as the information on the number of games is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of t7. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time) for the base effect for the additional period from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred) has been added.

Further, since the stop command generated at the timing of t7 is the last stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the timing of t7 becomes the end timing of this game as shown in FIG. 65 (a). At the timing of t7, the loop lottery end command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. Therefore, at the timing of t8, which is the timing when the additional effect indicating that the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, the number of additional games generated this time) has been added is completed, the base for the addition period. As shown in FIG. 65 (f), an additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has been completed is added to the effect. The additional effect ends at the timing of t9.

As described above, the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), which is activated at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, is activated once, and further, as described above, the loop lottery process is performed once. The maximum number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3411) is set to 1000 when the loop lottery is executed when the loop lottery is generated and won in the generated lottery process (step S3014). Has been done. Therefore, the estimated time required to complete the loop lottery started when the loop lottery is generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is 1.5 seconds or less. Become. On the other hand, the shortest period required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the effective operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is 600 milliseconds, and the rotating reels 32L, 32M, The shortest time required from the start of the stop control by the generation of the stop command to the 32R until the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for generating the next stop command becomes effective is also 500 milliseconds. Then, the time required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the generation of the stop command for the last reel 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation is 1.6 seconds or more. Therefore, the loop lottery started in this game is surely completed by the time the stop command is issued for the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation.

Next, a case where the end trigger of the loop lottery has occurred before the stop command is issued for the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

At the timing of t10, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (a). The game is started during the addition period of the AT state ST5. Therefore, when the game is started, the base effect for the additional period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game, the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is executed by winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 15, and as shown in FIG. 65 (b). The loop lottery will be won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has started and the 10 games are in the AT state ST5 with respect to the base effect for the additional period. An additional effect is added to indicate that it has been added to the number of continuous games remaining in.

After that, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. As a result, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Since the addition is won in the addition lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) that is repeatedly executed until the stop command is generated, the information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition is won is added. The loop addition command included as the information on the number of games is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of t12. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time) for the base effect for the additional period from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred) has been added.

After that, at the timing of t14, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the situation where the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating as shown in FIG. 65 (d). By being operated, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The additional winning was achieved in the additional lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) that was repeatedly executed from the occurrence of the previous stop command to the occurrence of the current stop command. The loop addition command including the information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times is added as the information on the number of games is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of t14. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time) for the base effect for the additional period from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred) has been added.

In addition, the additional lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) executed at a predetermined plurality of times from the occurrence of the previous stop command to the occurrence of the current stop command results in a loss. Therefore, the loop lottery end command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92 at the timing of t14. However, since the stop command this time is not the last stop command, even if the loop lottery end command is received, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is not executed, and the end wait flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set. "1" is set.

After that, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and operated in the situation where one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 65 (d). As a result, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the result is that the addition lottery process (step S3411) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is out of order by the time the previous stop command is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the loop addition command is not transmitted when the stop command is generated this time.

Since the stop command generated at the timing of t16 is the last stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the timing of t16 is the end timing of this game as shown in FIG. 65 (a). Further, as already described, "1" is set in the end waiting flag of the effect side RAM 94 at the timing of t14. Therefore, at the timing of t16, an additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has been completed is added to the base effect for the additional period as shown in FIG. 65 (f). The additional effect ends at the timing of t17.

As described above, the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started, and the additional lottery process is performed for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62). (Step S3411) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started in a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is performed between the acquisition of the second random number once and the acquisition of the second random number. A waiting period for the startup cycle occurs. Then, it takes at least 1.49 seconds for the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3411) to reach 1000, which is the end reference number. In this case, in the game generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), the reels 32L, 32M until the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3411) reaches 1000 times, which is the end reference number. If the configuration is such that the start of the rotation of the 32R is waited for, the time required for the start game to end becomes longer accordingly.

On the other hand, even if the generation winning is achieved in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Even if there is, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated until the result of the additional lottery process (step S3411) is out of order or the value of the lottery execution counter reaches "1000" which is the end reference number, and the loop lottery is performed. Every time the process (FIG. 62) is executed, the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed. Then, the number of games given by winning the addition in the addition lottery process (step S3411) after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started is appropriately added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. To. As a result, a large number of games is given as an additional game number to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 while preventing the time waiting for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from becoming excessively long. Is possible.

When a new stop command is generated for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the addition winning is performed in the addition lottery process (step S3411) of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) until the stop command is generated. An additional effect is executed to indicate that the number of games corresponding to the number of times of the game is added to the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5. As a result, the number of additional games notified at one time is increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect of increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 each time the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed. It is possible to do more. Further, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is notified each time the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the matter.

Even if the event that the loop lottery is terminated because the addition is not won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) occurs before the stop command corresponding to the second stop is generated, the loop lottery is completed. The effect shown is executed when a stop command is generated for the last reel 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation. As a result, the player's expectation that the number of games will be added by the loop lottery will be maintained until the stop operation to the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation occurs. It is possible to make it.

<About irregular games>
Next, the execution content of the effect when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3) is executed as an irregular game during the addition period of the AT state ST5. Will be explained.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device 63 when a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed as an irregular game during the addition period of the AT state ST5. be. As described above, in the base effect for the additional period in the image display device 63, the moving image of the second base image G61 is displayed, and the moving image of a plurality of types of the second effect image G62 is displayed in front of the second base image G61. The remaining game number display image G63, the acquired number display image G64, and the additional period game number display image G65 are displayed. In this case, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state is executed as an irregular game during the addition period of the AT state ST5, the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped. Then, the image display device 63 displays an image for notifying that the vehicle is stopped. Specifically, as an image display for notification during stop, the image "Progress is stopped!" Is displayed as the progress-stopped image G71 on the image display device 63, and the progress-stopped image G71 is displayed on the image display device 63. The dark color display state G72 is set so that the area other than the displayed area (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed) is displayed dimly than before. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped due to the occurrence of the irregular game.

The processing configuration for stopping the progress of the base effect for the additional period and executing the stopped notification for the occurrence of the irregular game will be described below. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an irregular process executed by the staging side MPU 92. The irregular processing is executed in step S3217 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

When a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 during the addition period (step S3701 and step S3702: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the progress stop flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3701 and step S3702: YES). Step S3703). The progress stopped flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that the progress of the base staging for the additional period is stopped.

When "1" is not set in the progress stop flag (step S3703: NO), whether or not the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Determination (step S3704). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game.

When the current game is an irregular game (step S3704: YES), the selection process of the stopped progress data table is executed (step S3705). In the selection process, a data table in progress is selected from among a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected data table during progress / stop is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3706). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the progress / stopped data table read this time is stored in the third control area 113. By storing the progress / stop data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the progress / stop data table. As a result, the image "Progress is stopped!" Is additionally displayed on the image display device 63 as the progress-stopped image G71 with respect to the image of the base effect for the additional period, and the progress is stopped on the image display device 63. The dark color display state G72 is set so that the area other than the area where the middle image G71 is displayed (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed) is displayed dimly than before.

Since the voice data corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, the sound corresponding to the stopped notification is output from the speaker 62. Further, since the light emitting data corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the image data for enabling the display corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, at least one of the voice data and the light emission data is set. The configuration may not be set.

After that, "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3707). As a result, as will be described in detail later, the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. However, even if the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped, the image of the base effect for the addition period is displayed on the image display device 63 by using the image data corresponding to the pointer information in the stopped state. It is displayed in. As already described for the image of the base effect for the additional period, the dark color display state G72 is displayed dimly based on the progress / stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 of the effect side RAM 94. Image processing is performed to achieve this.

When "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3703: YES), the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Whether or not it is determined (step S3708). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game. When the current game is an irregular game (step S3708: YES), the irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S3709 and S3710. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped, and the state in which the stopped notification is executed is maintained.

If the game this time is not an irregular game (step S3708: NO), the third control area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). As a result, the execution of the stopped notification is terminated. In addition, the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3710). As a result, as will be described in detail later, the state in which the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base production for the additional period will be resumed. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process of the second control area 112 executed by the effect side MPU 92. The pointer update process of the second control area 112 is executed in step S3306 in the task process (FIG. 60).

When "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3801: YES), the pointer update process of the second control area 112 is terminated without executing the processes after step S3802. Therefore, when the progress / stop flag is set to "1", the pointer information in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is not updated.

When "1" is not set in the progress / stop flag of the effecting side RAM 94 (step S3801: NO), a process for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read in the second control area 112. Is executed (step S3802). Specifically, when the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the additional period data table is stored. Set the pointer information in the first order to the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the following order is newly referred to with respect to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information to be. Further, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the first order in the ending data table is stored. Is set in the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the ending data table stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the following order should be newly referred to with respect to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the data table (step S3803). If the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table exceeds the last-order pointer information in the additional period data table. To judge. Further, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table exceeds the last-order pointer information in the ending data table. judge.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3803, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is set to the pointer information in the first order in the data table (step S3804). When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table is set as the pointer information in the first order in the additional period data table. When the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is set as the pointer information in the first order in the ending data table.

Next, how the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped by the execution of the irregular game will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 69. FIG. 69 (a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 69 (b) shows the situation of the additional period, and FIG. 69 (c) refers to the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112. FIG. 69 (d) shows the period during which the power pointer information can be updated, and FIG. 69 (d) shows the period during which the irregular game (the game in which the number of bets is “2” and the game in the CB state) is executed, and FIG. 69 (e) shows. Indicates the period during which the outage notification is executed.

At the timing of t1, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 69 (a). In the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game, the transfer lottery process (step S3004) of the additional period is executed by winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 15, and the transfer winning of the additional period is further performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the addition period is started at the timing of t2, which is the end timing of this game. Further, by transmitting the start command of the addition period from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92, the data table for the addition period is stored in the second control area 112 of the production side RAM 94. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table can be updated.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 69 (a). Since the game is not an irregular game like the game from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 is added as the addition period progresses. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated, so that the base effect for the additional period progresses. Become.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 69 (a). Since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2", it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 69 (d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is stopped. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6. The state in which the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped is continued until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game by the irregular game is finished, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped is maintained at least until the next game is started.

Further, from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, the stop notification is executed as shown in FIG. 69 (e). As a result, in the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the base effect for the additional period, which is the state in which the progress is stopped at the timing of t5, becomes the dark color display state G72 which is displayed dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. Image G71 is additionally displayed. Further, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stopped notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification. The state in which this stopped notification is executed is continued until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game by the irregular game is finished, the state in which the stopped notification is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 69 (a). The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 69 (c) at the timing of t7, which is the start timing of the current game, was updated last time. Is restarted from the pointer information at the time when it was stopped. As a result, at the timing of t7, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content that was stopped last time. Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 69 (e), the stopped notification is terminated.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 69 (a). Since the game is not an irregular game, the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 is added as the addition period progresses. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated, so that the base effect for the additional period progresses. Become.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 69 (a). Since the CB prize is established in the game immediately before the game, the game is a game in the CB state, and is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 69 (d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is stopped. As a result, at the timing of t11, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped is started. Further, at the timing of t11, the stopped notification is started as shown in FIG. 69 (e). As a result, in the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the base effect for the additional period, which is the state where the progress is stopped at the timing of t11, becomes the dark color display state G72 which is displayed dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. Image G71 is additionally displayed. Further, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stopped notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification.

After that, a plurality of games are executed in the CB state including the timing of t13 to the timing of t14 and the timing of t15 to t16. Therefore, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is stopped. , The stopped notification is executed as shown in FIG. 69 (e).

The CB state ends at the timing of t16. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the first game after the CB state ends is executed from the timing of t17 to the timing of t18. The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 69 (c) at the timing of t17, which is the start timing of the current game, was updated last time. Is restarted from the pointer information at the time when it was stopped. As a result, at the timing of t17, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content that was stopped last time. Further, at the timing of t17, the stopped notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 69 (e).

As described above, when the irregular game is executed during the addition period, not only the progress of the addition period is stopped, but also the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped. This makes it possible to make the progress of the base staging for the addition period correspond to the progress of the addition period.

If the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped, the stopped notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the progress of the additional period has been stopped due to the execution of the irregular game.

When the stop notification is executed, the image display device 63 is in a state where the player can recognize the image of the base effect for the additional period at the timing when the progress is stopped. As a result, when the execution of the irregular game is completed and the base effect for the additional period is restarted, the progress of the image is restarted from the image content of the base effect for the additional period immediately before the progress is stopped. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize it.

Next, a processing configuration executed by the staging side MPU 92 during the ending period of the AT state ST5 will be described.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by the staging side MPU 92. The ending process is executed in step S3218 in the AT effect control process (FIG. 59).

First, it is determined whether or not the first ending command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901). As already explained, the first ending command is the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. This command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 when the number of games exceeds the upper limit. When the first ending command is received (step S3901: YES), "1" is set in the first ending flag on the effect side provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3902). The first ending flag on the staging side is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the first ending command has been received from the main MPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S3901 or when the process of step S3902 is executed, it is determined whether or not a second ending command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3903). As already explained, the second ending command acquires the total value of the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter, and the sum of the expected values of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. This command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 when the result of adding to the value of the number counter 74d becomes the upper limit net increase number or more. When the second ending command is received (step S3903: YES), "1" is set in the second ending flag on the effect side provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3904). The second ending flag on the staging side is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the second ending command has been received from the main MPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S3903 or when the process of step S3904 is executed, it is determined whether or not any kind of ending data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. Then, it is determined whether or not the base effect for the ending period is being executed (step S3905). When a negative determination is made in step S3905, "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3906: YES), and the current gaming state is the AT state. In the case of ST5 (step S3907: YES), the selection process of the ending data table is executed (step S3908).

In the selection process, among the plurality of types of ending data tables included in the ending data table group 103 of the effect side ROM 93, the ending data table to be referred to in the current ending period is determined. In this case, if "1" is set in the first ending flag on the production side, it is included in the first ending command that triggered the setting of "1" in the first ending flag on the production side. The ending data table corresponding to the information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference target. In this way, by configuring the ending data table corresponding to the information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied as a reference target, the progress content of the base effect for the ending period can be determined. It is possible to make the content corresponding to the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, if "1" is set in the second ending flag on the production side, it is included in the second ending command that triggered the setting of "1" in the second ending flag on the production side. The ending data table corresponding to the information on the total net increase in the number of limited game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference target. In this way, the ending data table corresponding to the information on the total net increase in the number of limited game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference target for the ending period. It is possible to set the progress content of the base production of the above to the content corresponding to the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied.

In addition, when the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is the pointer information corresponding to the execution of the effect corresponding to the final game, but the game is actually before the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. Is executed by interrupting the game in which the ending condition is satisfied, and the effect corresponding to the final game is executed when the ending condition is satisfied. In addition, if the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table has not reached the pointer information corresponding to the execution of the effect corresponding to the final game, but the ending condition is satisfied, the game should be referred to. The pointer information is adjusted to the pointer information corresponding to the execution of the effect corresponding to the final game.

After that, the ending data table of the type selected in step S3908 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3909). In this case, after clearing "0" in the second control area 112, the ending data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112. By storing the ending data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the ending data table, and the base effect for the ending period is executed.

When the base effect for the ending period is being executed (step S3905: YES), the first ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set on condition that the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3910: YES). It is determined whether or not "1" is set in (step S3911). When "1" is not set in the first ending flag (step S3911: NO), the ending period of this time is the sum of the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter, and the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. It means that the start was triggered when the result of adding the value of the result of accumulating the expected acquisition values of the game media in the above to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d becomes the upper limit net increase number or more. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3912).

When "1" is not set in the progress stop flag (step S3912: NO), whether or not the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Determination (step S3913). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game.

When the current game is an irregular game (step S3913: YES), the selection process of the stopped progress data table is executed (step S3914). In the selection process, a data table in progress is selected from among a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected data table during progress / stop is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3915). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the progress / stopped data table read this time is stored in the third control area 113. By storing the progress / stop data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the progress / stop data table. As a result, the image "Progress is stopped!" Is additionally displayed on the image display device 63 as the progress-stopped image G71 with respect to the image of the base effect for the ending period, and the progress is stopped on the image display device 63. The dark color display state G72 is set so that the area other than the area where the middle image G71 is displayed (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the ending period is displayed) is displayed dimly than before.

Since the voice data corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, the sound corresponding to the stopped notification is output from the speaker 62. Further, since the light emitting data corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the image data for enabling the display corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, at least one of the voice data and the light emission data is set. The configuration may not be set.

After that, "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3916). As a result, the update of the pointer information of the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped. However, even when the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped, the image of the base effect for the ending period is displayed on the image display device 63 by using the image data corresponding to the pointer information in the stopped state. It is displayed in. As already described for the image of the base effect for the ending period, the dark color display state G72 is displayed dimly based on the progress / stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 of the effect side RAM 94. Image processing is performed to achieve this.

When "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3912: YES), the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Whether or not it is determined (step S3917). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game. When the current game is an irregular game (step S3917: YES), the irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S3918 and S3919. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped, and the stopped notification is maintained.

If the game this time is not an irregular game (step S3917: NO), the third control area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S3918). As a result, the execution of the stopped notification is terminated. In addition, the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3919). As a result, the state in which the update of the pointer information of the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base production for the ending period will be resumed. In this case, the base effect for the ending period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

With the above configuration, the total acquisition number counter 74d is the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition values of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. In the ending period started when the result of adding to the value of is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase, if an irregular game is executed, the progress of the base production for the ending period is stopped and stopped. Medium notification is executed.

As described above, not only the game in which the number of bets in the non-CB state is "3" but also the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed, the total number of acquisition counters 74d. Update is performed. In this case, as described above in the game in which the number of bets is "2" and the game in the CB state, the expected net increase in the game medium in one game (from "the expected number of game media to be granted in one game" to "1 game". The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet") is less than 1. Then, the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result becomes the maximum net increase number or more, the number of games required for the ending condition to be satisfied increases as the irregular game is executed. Under such circumstances, the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result of adding to is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase, if an irregular game is executed, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped and the stop notification is stopped. By configuring the above to be executed, it is possible to change the content of the base effect for the ending period to the content of the effect corresponding to the number of remaining games by the time the ending condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the first ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3911: YES), a process for stopping the progress of the base effect for the ending period for the execution of the irregular game is performed. Do not execute. Further, when "1" is set in the first ending flag and "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effecting side RAM 94 (step S3911: YES, step S3920: YES), the third control Clear the area 113 by "0" (step S3918). As a result, the execution of the stopped notification is terminated. In addition, the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3919). As a result, the state in which the update of the pointer information of the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base production for the ending period will be resumed. In this case, the base effect for the ending period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

With the above configuration, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or more than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started with the event, even if the irregular game is executed, the progress of the base production for the ending period is not stopped.

As described above, the continuation of the main RAM 74 is not limited to the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state, but also the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed. The update of the game number counter 74c is executed. Then, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes the upper limit number of games or more. In the ending period started as, even if the game of irregular game is executed, the number of games required until the ending condition is satisfied does not change. Under such circumstances, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes equal to or more than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started with this as an opportunity, even if the irregular game is executed, the progress of the base production for the ending period is not stopped.

Next, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped due to the execution of the irregular game and the state in which the progress is stopped will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71. FIG. 71 (a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 71 (b) shows the period in which “1” is set in the first ending flag on the production side, and FIG. 71 (c) shows the second on the production side. The period in which "1" is set in the ending flag is shown, and FIG. 71 (d) shows the period in which the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 can be updated. 71 (e) shows the period during which the irregular game (the game in which the number of bets is “2” and the game in the CB state) is executed, and FIG. 71 (f) shows the period during which the stopped notification is executed. ..

The sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. The case where the ending period is started will be described.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), a new game is executed in the AT state ST5 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. When the game is executed, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is the second section. It becomes more than the upper limit game number of SC2. Therefore, when the first ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92, “1” is set in the first ending flag on the staging side as shown in FIG. 71 (b) at the timing of t2. Further, since "1" is set in the first ending flag on the effect side in the AT state ST5, the ending period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table can be updated.

After that, in the ending period, a plurality of games are executed as shown in FIG. 71 (a) including the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the timing of t7 to the timing of t8. In this case, the irregular game is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 71 (e), but the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 and the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 In the ending period triggered by the sum of the value of and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becoming equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, regardless of whether or not the irregular game is executed. , As shown in FIG. 71 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table is sequentially updated.

After that, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied at the timing of t8. Therefore, the AT state ST5 ends with the forced termination of the second section SC2. Further, since the ending period ends, the second control area 112 is cleared to "0".

Next, the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. The case where the ending period is started when the result is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), a new game is executed in the AT state ST5 from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. When the game is executed, the total number of acquisitions is the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter, and the value obtained by integrating the expected acquisition values of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. The result of adding to the value of the counter 74d is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the second ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92, "1" is set in the second ending flag on the staging side as shown in FIG. 71 (c) at the timing of t10. Further, since "1" is set in the second ending flag on the effect side in the AT state ST5, the ending period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. Then, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table can be updated.

Then, in the ending period, a new game is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 71 (a). Since the game is not an irregular game, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table is updated as shown in FIG. 71 (d).

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 71 (a). Since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2", it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 71 (e). Therefore, "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94, and as shown in FIG. 71 (d), a pointer to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112. Information update is stopped. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. The state in which the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped is continued until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game by the irregular game is finished, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped is maintained at least until the next game is started.

Further, from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, the stop notification is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (f). As a result, in the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the base effect for the ending period, which is the state in which the progress is stopped at the timing of t13, is displayed in a dark color display state G72 which is displayed dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. Image G71 is additionally displayed. Further, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stopped notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification. The state in which this stopped notification is executed is continued until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game by the irregular game is finished, the state in which the stopped notification is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16 as shown in FIG. 71 (a). The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 71 (d) at the timing of t15, which is the start timing of the current game, was updated last time. Is restarted from the pointer information at the time when it was stopped. As a result, at the timing of t15, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is restarted from the effect content that was previously stopped. Further, at the timing of t15, the stopped notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 71 (f).

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t17 to the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 71 (a). Since the CB prize is established in the game immediately before the game, the game is a game in the CB state, and is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 71 (e). Therefore, "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94, and as shown in FIG. 71 (d), a pointer to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112. Information update is stopped. As a result, at the timing of t17, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped is started. Further, at the timing of t17, the stop notification is started as shown in FIG. 71 (f). As a result, in the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the base effect for the ending period, which is the state in which the progress is stopped at the timing of t17, becomes the dark color display state G72 which is displayed dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. Image G71 is additionally displayed. Further, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stopped notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification.

After that, a plurality of games are executed in the CB state including the timing of t19 to the timing of t20 and the timing of t21 to t22. That is, each of the games from the timing of t19 to the timing of t20 and the timing of t21 to the timing of t22 is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 71 (e). In this case, until the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 is stopped, and FIG. As shown in f), the stop notification is executed.

However, at the timing of t20, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is the second section SC2. It becomes more than the maximum number of games. Therefore, when the first ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92, “1” is set in the first ending flag on the staging side as shown in FIG. 71 (b) at the timing of t20.

At the timing of t21, the game is started with "1" set in the first ending flag on the production side. Therefore, the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", and even in a situation where the irregular game is being executed, it is stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 71 (d). The update of the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table is restarted. Further, at the timing of the t21, the stopped notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 71 (f).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) that continues over multiple games can occur, the effect is more diverse than the configuration in which only one-shot effect is executed for each game. It will be possible to achieve this. In this case, a game or CB state in which the number of bets is "2" as an irregular game game (that is, a non-target game) in a situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is executed. When the game (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) occurs, the progress of the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is stopped. As a result, even when an irregular game game in which it is not preferable to proceed with the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) occurs, the base effect for the additional period (or the base for the ending period) occurs. It is possible to prevent the production) from progressing. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period).

If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is being executed, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) Not only is the progress stopped, but the stopped notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) has not been continued due to the occurrence of the irregular game game.

If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is being executed, the base effect for the additional period (or the base for the ending period) at that time occurs. The still image of the effect) continues to be displayed on the image display device 63. That is, the image corresponding to the timing at which the irregular game has occurred is displayed on the image display device 63 as a stop notification. This makes it possible to associate the execution content of the stopped notification with the progress content of the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the stopped notification. In addition, the player feels uncomfortable with the fact that the stop notification is executed instead of the situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued due to the occurrence of the irregular game game. It becomes possible to make it difficult to give.

Data for displaying the stopped image G71 and data for displaying the still image at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period). By applying the data for setting the dark color display state G72, the data for displaying the still image is processed, and by using the processed data, the image for notifying during stoppage is displayed. As a result, as an image for notifying during stoppage, a still image at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is displayed in the dark color display state G72 and progresses. The stopped image G71 is displayed. That is, since it is not the still image itself at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), the player indicates that the image for notification during stoppage is displayed. It becomes easier to recognize.

Even if the base production for the addition period (or the base production for the ending period) is not continued due to the occurrence of an irregular game in the base production for the addition period (or the base production for the ending period). After that, when a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3" occurs as the target game, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is restarted. As a result, even if an irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) does not occur as it is. It is possible to prevent it from becoming, and it is possible to secure an opportunity for a base effect for the additional period (or a base effect for the ending period) to occur.

In particular, due to the occurrence of an irregular game in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is no longer continued. Even so, if the target game occurs after that, the base effect for the additional period (or the base for the ending period) from the content of the timing that was stopped last time in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) Production) is resumed. As a result, even if a game of irregular game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), if the target game occurs after that, the base effect (or the ending period) for the additional period occurs. It is possible to let the player confirm the continuation content of the base production).

When a game in which the number of bets is "3" occurs in the non-CB state, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is continued, whereas the number of bets is in the non-CB state. When the game of "2" occurs, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which the number of bets is "2" has occurred. In particular, a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous to the player than a game with a bet number of "2". In this case, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which the number of bets, which is relatively disadvantageous, is "2" has occurred.

In a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a non-CB state, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is continued, whereas in the CB state, the number of bets Even in a game in which is "3", the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game in the CB state has occurred.

When a game of irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the ending period is being executed, "1" is set in the first ending flag of the effect side for the base effect for the ending period. There is a difference between the case where it is executed when it is executed and the case where the base effect for the ending period is executed when "1" is set in the second ending flag on the effect side. There is. As a result, it becomes possible to make the production content when the irregular game game occurs correspond to the type of the ending period in which the game is occurring. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the base effect for the ending period.

Even if an irregular game occurs in the middle of the base production for the ending period, which is executed when "1" is set in the first ending flag on the production side, the base production for the ending period will be If a game of irregular game occurs in the middle of the base production for the ending period, which is continued and is executed when "1" is set in the second ending flag on the production side, it is for the ending period. The base production of is not continued. As a result, depending on the type of ending period that is occurring, the situation where the base production for the ending period is continued when the game of irregular game occurs, and the situation for the ending period when the game of irregular game occurs. It is possible to create a situation in which the base effect is not continuously executed.

The base production for the ending period is due to the occurrence of an irregular game in the middle of the base production for the ending period, which is being executed when "1" is set in the second ending flag on the production side. Even if it is not continued, if "1" is set in the first ending flag on the staging side, even if an irregular game is occurring, it is for the ending period. The base production will continue. As a result, even during the base production for the ending period, which is being executed when "1" is set in the second ending flag on the production side, "1" is set in the first ending flag on the production side. When is set, the handling when an irregular game is generated is the base for the ending period that is executed when "1" is set in the first ending flag on the staging side. It is possible to do the same as in the case of directing.

It starts when the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes equal to or more than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period (that is, the ending period started when "1" is set in the first ending flag on the production side), even if the irregular game game is executed, it is for the ending period. The progress of the base production is not stopped. Even when not only the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state but also the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed, the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 Update is performed. Then, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes the upper limit number of games or more. In the ending period started as, even if the game of irregular game is executed, the number of games required until the ending condition is satisfied does not change. Under such circumstances, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes equal to or more than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started with this as an opportunity, even if the irregular game is executed, the progress of the base production for the ending period is not stopped.

On the other hand, the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result exceeds the upper limit net increase number, if the game of irregular game is executed, the progress of the base production for the ending period is stopped and the stop notification is notified. Will be executed. The update of the total acquisition number counter 74d is executed even when the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed as well as the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state. Will be done. In this case, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" and the game in the CB state, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game ("expected number of game media granted in one game" to "bet in one game". The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media") is less than 1. Then, the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result becomes the maximum net increase number or more, the number of games required for the ending condition to be satisfied increases as the irregular game is executed. Under such circumstances, the value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition values of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result of adding to is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase, if the game of irregular game is executed, the progress of the base production for the ending period is stopped and stopped. By configuring the middle notification to be executed, it is possible to change the content of the base effect for the ending period to the content of the effect corresponding to the number of remaining games by the time the ending condition is satisfied.

The production side RAM 94 is provided with a first control area 111 and a second control area 112 as storage areas from which the data table is read. This makes it possible to create a situation in which a plurality of data tables are being read at the same time. Further, when the AT data table is read in the first control area 111 and the addition period data table is read in the second control area 112, the addition read in the second control area 112 is performed. While the execution control of the effect is performed according to the period data table, the execution control of the effect according to the AT data table read out in the first control area 111 is not performed. As a result, the second control area 112 can be set as a storage area having priority over the first control area 111 as the storage area to be executed by the execution control of the effect, and a plurality of data tables are read out at the same time. In a configuration that enables a situation to occur, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the side that should be prioritized as the execution target of the execution control of the staging.

In this case, the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 is performed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the additional period data table read out to the second control area 112. Even if the execution control of the effect according to the above is not performed, the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is continued. Therefore, when the addition period ends and the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 that was executed immediately before the start of the addition period is not restarted. The base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the content at the time when the addition period has progressed for the period during which the addition period was executed, as opposed to the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 that was executed immediately before the addition period started. To. As a result, it is possible to restart the base effect for the AT state ST5 in a state where the progress of the base effect for the AT state ST5 reflects the elapse of the period in which the addition period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effect content to be executed when the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted.

Since the execution control of the effect according to the additional period data table read out to the second control area 112 is performed, the effect according to the AT data table read out to the first control area 111. Even if the execution control of is not performed, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continuously updated, but when the pointer information to be referenced becomes the pointer information in the last order. A new lap of updating the pointer information to be referenced is not started. As a result, the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the additional period data table read out to the second control area 112 continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent the pointer information to be referred from being continuously updated.

The update cycle of the pointer information to be referred to by the AT data table of the first control area 111 at the timing when the additional period data table is read out from the second control area 112 is the additional period data table of the second control area 112. If it ends in the middle of the execution control of the effect according to the above, and if the data table for the additional period is not read after that in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the first order is used. The update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table of the first control area 111 is started, and the effect corresponding to the pointer information in the first order is started. That is, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect content. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect content when the addition period ends.

Occurrence of loop lottery In the game generated in the lottery process (step S3014), the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is performed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated until the lottery end trigger occurs. The addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed once, and the addition winning is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S3411), so that the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is added by 1. As a result, the player expects to be a generated winning in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), and a larger number of games will be given to the generated winning game. You will expect it. Further, if a notification trigger occurs even in a situation where the lottery end trigger has not occurred in the game that has been won, the additional lottery process executed until the notification trigger occurs (step S3411). The number of games given based on the result of is notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of notifying that the number of games has been given in the game that has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When a new stop command is generated for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the addition winning is performed in the addition lottery process (step S3411) of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) until the stop command is generated. An additional effect is executed indicating that the number of games corresponding to the number of times of the game is added to the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5. As a result, the number of additional games notified at one time is increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect of increasing the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 each time the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed. It is possible to do more. Further, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is notified each time the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the matter.

When the first notification trigger occurs in the game that has been won, it is given based on the result of the additional lottery process (step S3411) executed from the start of the game to the occurrence of the first notification trigger. When the number of games is notified and the second and subsequent notification triggers occur in the game that has been won, the additional lottery process (step S3411) executed from the previous occurrence of the notification trigger to the current occurrence of the notification trigger has occurred. ) Will be notified of the number of games granted. This makes it possible to prevent the number of games notified in each notification trigger from overlapping with the number of games notified in other notification triggers.

Occurrence of loop lottery When the generation is won in the lottery process (step S3014), 10 games are given at the start of the game and it is notified that the 10 games are given. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the game that has won the occurrence, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game that has won the occurrence.

Even if the event that the loop lottery is terminated because the addition is not won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) occurs before the stop command corresponding to the second stop is generated, the loop lottery is completed. The effect shown is executed when a stop command is generated for the last reel 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation. As a result, the player's expectation that the number of games will be added by the loop lottery will be maintained until the stop operation to the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last reels 32L, 32M, 32R during rotation occurs. It is possible to make it.

The situation in which the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated is generated in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) and ends within the range of the winning game. do. This makes it possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 from increasing excessively.

If the result is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is as follows: middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L. When the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the left reel 32L → the right reel 32R. The combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol may be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. Further, when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → the right reel 32R → the left reel 32L. The combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R. When becomes, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol may be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. Therefore, in the final game of the transition waiting period, if the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is missed or the index value IV = 16 is won, the transition is performed by using the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Pseudo-bonus state It is possible to notify whether the type of ST4 is a big bonus or a regular bonus.

As a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role that triggers the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 and the type thereof using the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the index value IV = 16. Winning and losing results are set. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 are displayed.

When the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the final game of the transition waiting period, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R suggests that it is a big bonus "Red 7". "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol, which suggests that the combination of "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and that it is a regular bonus. In any case where the combination of "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed as a stop result, the normal replay prize is given and the privilege of the replay is given. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while not affecting the profit given to the player.

In the final game of the transition waiting period, when the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost or the index value IV = 16 is won and the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, The display corresponding to the notified stop order is performed on the combined display unit 66. As a result, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63 whose display is controlled by the effect side MPU 92, the combined display unit 66 whose display is controlled by the main side MPU 72 corresponds to it. It is possible to make the display to be performed.

If the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is out of order in the final game of the transition waiting period, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left reel 32L. A stop result indicating that it is a big bonus is displayed, and if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R, a stop result indicating that it is a regular bonus is displayed. .. On the other hand, when the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is won at the index value IV = 16 in the final game of the transition waiting period, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the middle reel 32M → right reel 32R → left. If the reel is 32L, a stop result indicating that it is a regular bonus is displayed, and if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M → left reel 32L → right reel 32R, it is a stop indicating that it is a big bonus. The result is displayed. That is, the stop order and regular bonus of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for displaying the stop result indicating that it is a big bonus in the case of the off result and the case of winning with the index value IV = 16. The relationship of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for displaying the stop result indicating the above is the reverse relationship. As a result, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the final game of the transition waiting period, the stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes either a big bonus or a regular bonus. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the corresponding stop result is displayed.

Even if it is decided to shift to the big bonus, if the result of the lottery process (Fig. 16) of the winning combination is the winning or losing result with the index value IV = 16 in the final game of the transition waiting period, " The combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the reel effect is executed to execute "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7". The combination of symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even if the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is informed that a reel effect suggesting a transition to the big bonus will occur thereafter. It will be possible to expect.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the effect when the irregular game is executed during the addition period of the AT state ST5 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups 101 to 104, 121 provided in the effect side ROM 93 of the present embodiment.

In the production side ROM 93, as various table groups 101 to 104, 121, the AT data table group 101, the additional period data table group 102, the ending data table group 103, and the game data are similarly described in the first embodiment. The table group 104 is stored in advance, and the irregular data table group 121 is stored in advance. The irregular data table group 121 includes a plurality of types of irregular data tables. In the irregular data table, data for controlling the execution of the irregular intermediate effect, which is executed instead of the base effect for the additional period when an irregular game occurs during the additional period, is set. The irregular data table is provided with a one-to-one correspondence with the additional period data table. The same number of pointer information as the corresponding type of additional period data table is set in the plurality of types of irregular data tables.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a predetermined type of irregular data table. In the irregular data table, the first data table is set for the pointer information of "0" to "k", and the second data table is set for the pointer information of "k + 1" to "m". , The third data table is set for the pointer information of "m + 1" to "n", and the fourth data table is set for the pointer information of "n + 1" to "p". A fifth data table is set in the pointer information of "q". That is, in the irregular data table, the pointer information of the serial numbers is divided into a plurality of groups that do not overlap with each other, and each group is assigned a plurality of pointer information of the serial numbers and each of the groups. Different data tables are set corresponding to.

By controlling the execution of the effect according to the first data table, the first type of irregular medium effect is executed. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first type of irregular staging. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the first type of irregular medium effect, the moving image of the first irregular image G81 is performed by the scenery in the city and the first irregular medium character image. The image data for displaying the first irregular image G81 as a moving image is set in the first data table. Further, in the first data table, audio data for outputting the sound corresponding to the first type of irregular medium effect from the speaker 62 and light emission corresponding to the first type of irregular medium effect are emitted to the upper lamp 61. The light emission data is set so that it can be performed. A plurality of pointer information is set in a serial number in the first data table, and a combination of the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data is set corresponding to each pointer information.

By controlling the execution of the effect according to the second data table, the second type of irregular medium effect is executed. FIG. 74B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second type of irregular staging. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the second type of irregular medium effect, a moving image of the second irregular image G82 is performed by a large number of second irregular medium character images. The content of the second irregular image G82 is different from the content of the first irregular image G81. The image data for displaying the second irregular image G82 as a moving image is set in the second data table. Further, in the second data table, audio data for outputting the sound corresponding to the second type of irregular medium effect from the speaker 62 and light emission corresponding to the second type of irregular medium effect are emitted to the upper lamp 61. The light emission data is set so that it can be performed. The content of the sound corresponding to the second type of irregular medium effect is different from the content of the sound corresponding to the first type of irregular medium effect, and the content of the light emission corresponding to the second type of irregular medium effect. Is different from the content of the light emission corresponding to the first type of irregular medium-sized production. A plurality of pointer information is set in a serial number in the second data table, and a combination of the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data is set corresponding to each pointer information.

The third type of irregular medium effect is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the third data table, and the fourth type of irregular medium effect is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the fourth data table. Then, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the fifth data table, so that the fifth type of irregular medium effect is executed. In these 3rd to 5th types of irregular medium effects, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the corresponding irregular images, and the speaker 62 displays the sounds corresponding to the respective types of irregular medium effects. Is output, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to each type of irregular medium effect. A plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers in each of the third to fifth data tables, and image data for displaying a moving image of the irregular image in correspondence with each pointer information, and the sound of the above. A combination of audio data for causing output and light emission data for causing the above light emission is set.

FIG. 72B is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 111 to 113 and 122 provided in the effect side RAM 94 of the present embodiment.

The staging side RAM 94 is provided with a first control area 111, a second control area 112, and a third control area 113 as various areas 111 to 113, 122, as in the first embodiment, and further, a fourth. A control area 122 is provided. In the first control area 111, the AT data table is read out in the AT state ST5 as in the first embodiment. In the second control area 112, the data table for the addition period is read out in the addition period, and the data table for the ending period is read out in the ending period, as in the first embodiment. The game data table is read out in the third control area 113 as in the first embodiment.

In the fourth control area 122, when an irregular game occurs during the addition period of the AT state ST5, the irregular data table of the irregular data table group 121 that is the reference target is read out. The fourth control area 122 is set to have a higher priority of the reference target than the second control area 112. Therefore, when an irregular game occurs during the addition period, the execution control of the irregular intermediate effect is performed according to the irregular data table read out in the fourth control area 122, and the irregular game is read out in the second control area 112. The execution control of the base effect according to the data table for the additional period is not performed. When the irregular game ends and the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started in the non-CB state, the irregular game is started by deleting the irregular data table from the fourth control area 122. The execution control of the base effect for the addition period is executed according to the data table for the addition period read out to the second control area 112 as before.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an irregular process in the present embodiment executed by the staging side MPU 92. The irregular processing is executed in step S3217 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

When a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 during the addition period (step S4001 and step S4002: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4003). .. Similar to the first embodiment, the progress stop flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped.

When "1" is not set in the progress stop flag (step S4003: NO), whether or not the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Determination (step S4004). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game.

When the current game is an irregular game (step S4004: YES), the selection process of the irregular data table is executed (step S4005). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of irregular data tables included in the irregular data table group 121 of the effect side ROM 93, the type of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 corresponds to. Select a type of irregular data table. Further, the current pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is grasped (step S4006). Then, among the first to fifth data tables in the irregular data table selected in step S4005, the data table set corresponding to the pointer information grasped in step S4006 is selected (step S4007). The selected data table is read from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the production side RAM 94 (step S4008). In this case, after clearing "0" in the fourth control area 122, the data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122. By storing the data table in the fourth control area 122, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the additional period, the irregular medium effect corresponding to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, as described above, the irregular medium effect is executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4009). As a result, the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. Further, as described above, the irregular medium effect according to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is more than the base effect for the additional period according to the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112. Is also preferentially executed, so that the base effect for the additional period is not executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4003: YES), the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Whether or not it is determined (step S4010). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game. When the current game is an irregular game (step S4010: YES), the irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S4011 and S4012. As a result, the state in which the irregular medium effect is executed instead of the base effect for the additional period is maintained.

If the game this time is not an irregular game (step S4010: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4011). As a result, the execution of the irregular production is completed. In addition, the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4012). As a result, the state in which the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base production for the additional period will be resumed. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a task process in the present embodiment executed by the staging side MPU 92. The task processing is repeatedly executed by the staging side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 6 milliseconds).

In step S4101, the same processing as in steps S3301 to S3315 of the task processing (FIG. 60) in the first embodiment is executed. By executing the process, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the first to third control areas 111 to 113 is updated. When "1" is set in the progress / stop flag of the effect side RAM 94, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated as in the first embodiment. Is stopped.

In the task process (FIG. 76), when any kind of data table is stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4102: YES), the pointer update process of the fourth control area 122 is executed. (Step S4103). In the pointer update process of the fourth control area 122, a process for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read in the fourth control area 122 is executed. Specifically, immediately after the data table is stored in the fourth control area 122, the pointer information in the first order in the data table is set as the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122, the pointer information in the next order is newly referred to the pointer information to be referred to in the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the data table (step S4104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is set to the pointer information in the first order in the data table (step S4105). As a result, a new lap of a series of irregular productions defined by the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is started. As already explained, when an irregular game occurs during the addition period, it corresponds to the type of base effect for the addition period and the irregular medium effect corresponding to the progress of the base effect for the addition period. However, it is executed instead of the base effect for the additional period. This irregular medium effect is set as a series of effects, and the final effect content in the series of effects is obtained by continuing the state in which the game in which the number of bets is "3" is not executed in the non-CB state. If it occurs, the series of effects will be executed again from the first effect content.

When a negative determination is made in step S4102, a negative determination is made in step S4104, or the process of step S4105 is executed, it is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the fourth control area 122. (Step S4106). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4106, the data setting process from the fourth control area 122 is executed (step S4107). In the data setting process from the fourth control area 122, in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed as irregular effects corresponding to various data set in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 in correspondence with the pointer information to be referred to at present. It will be executed on the display device 63.

When a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the second control area 112 (step S4108). If a negative determination is made in step S4108, the data setting process from the first control area 111 is executed (step S4109). In the data setting process from the first control area 111, in the data table stored in the first control area 111, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the image data, audio data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table are read out. .. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the AT state ST5 corresponding to various data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Will be done.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4108, the data setting process from the second control area 112 is executed (step S4110). In the data setting process from the second control area 112, in the data table stored in the second control area 112, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the image data, audio data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table are stored. Is read. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 provide the base effect for the addition period corresponding to various data set in the data table for the addition period corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to at present. It will be executed. When the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the image data, audio data, and light emission data set in the ending data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are obtained. Is read. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read voice data, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the ending period corresponding to various data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Will be.

When the process of step S4107 is executed, the process of step S4109 is executed, or the process of step S4110 is executed, it is determined whether or not any game data table is stored in the third control area 113. (Step S4111). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4111, the data setting process from the third control area 113 is executed (step S4112). In the data setting process from the third control area 113, in the data table stored in the third control area 113, the image data, the voice data, and the light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are input. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is such that the image corresponding to the read image data is added to the image of the effect corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111, the second control area 112, or the fourth control area 122. Is executed, and the sound output corresponding to the read audio data is superimposed on the sound output of the base effect corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111, the second control area 112, or the fourth control area 122. The sound output control of the upper lamp 61 is executed, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed so that the light emission pattern corresponding to the read light emission data is executed by interrupting the light emission pattern of the base effect.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a game of irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, an irregular intermediate effect having contents corresponding to the progress of the base effect for the additional period at that time is executed. .. As a result, it is possible to associate the execution content of the irregular medium effect with the progress status of the base effect for the additional period, and it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the irregular medium effect. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the irregular game is executed instead of the situation where the base effect for the additional period is not continued due to the occurrence of the irregular game. Become.

An irregular data table is stored in advance in the production side ROM 93, and if an irregular game game occurs in a situation where the base production for the addition period is being executed, the progress of the base production for the addition period. The content of the irregular medium effect corresponding to is specified from the irregular data table, and the irregular medium effect of the specified content is executed. As a result, while reducing the processing load, it is possible to execute an irregular medium-sized production having contents corresponding to the progress of the base production for the additional period.

It should be noted that the effect content of the irregular medium effect is not limited to the configuration that is irrelevant to the execution content of the base effect for the additional period immediately before the start of the irregular medium effect, and the effect content of the irregular medium effect is the relevant. The configuration may correspond to the execution content of the base effect for the additional period immediately before the start of the irregular medium effect. For example, the character image displayed at the timing when the game of the irregular game occurs in the base effect for the additional period may be continuously displayed even in the irregular effect. This makes it possible to associate the effect content of the irregular medium effect with the effect content of the base effect for the additional period at the timing when the game of the irregular game occurs.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the effect when the irregular game is executed during the addition period of the AT state ST5 is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an irregular process in the present embodiment executed by the staging side MPU 92. The irregular processing is executed in step S3217 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

When a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 during the addition period (step S4201 and step S4202: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first progress stop flag provided in the effect side RAM 94. (Step S4203). The first progress stop flag indicates that the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped when the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) occurs during the addition period. It is a flag for specifying by MPU92.

When "1" is not set in the first progress stopped flag (step S4203: NO), it is determined whether or not the game started this time is a game in the CB state (step S4204). When the game started this time is a game in the CB state (step S4204: YES), the selection process of the stopped progress data table is executed (step S4205). In the selection process, a data table in progress is selected from among a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect side ROM 93. Then, the selected data table during progress / stop is read out from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the third control area 113 of the production side RAM 94 (step S4206). In this case, after clearing "0" in the third control area 113, the progress / stopped data table read this time is stored in the third control area 113. By storing the progress / stop data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the progress / stop data table. As a result, the image "Progress is stopped!" Is additionally displayed on the image display device 63 as the progress-stopped image G71 with respect to the image of the base effect for the additional period, and the progress is stopped on the image display device 63. The dark color display state G72 is set so that the area other than the area where the middle image G71 is displayed (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed) is displayed dimly than before.

Since the voice data corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, the sound corresponding to the stopped notification is output from the speaker 62. Further, since the light emitting data corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stopped notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the image data for enabling the display corresponding to the stopped notification is set in the progress / stopped data table, at least one of the voice data and the light emission data is set. The configuration may not be set.

After that, "1" is set in the first progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4207). As a result, the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. However, even if the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped, the image of the base effect for the addition period is displayed on the image display device 63 by using the image data corresponding to the pointer information in the stopped state. It is displayed at. As already described for the image of the base effect for the additional period, the dark color display state G72 is displayed dimly based on the progress / stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 of the effect side RAM 94. Image processing is performed to achieve this.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second progress stop flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4208). The second progress stop flag indicates that the progress of the base production for the addition period is stopped when the game in which the number of bets in the non-CB state is "2" occurs during the addition period. It is a flag for specifying by MPU92.

When "1" is set in the second progress stop flag (step S4208: YES), the fourth control area 122 of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4209). As a result, the data table for executing the irregular effect stored in the fourth control area 122 is deleted, so that the irregular effect is terminated. That is, even if the irregular medium effect is started due to the occurrence of a game in which the number of bets in the non-CB state is "2" during the addition period, if the CB state occurs after that, the irregular medium effect is performed. It will be terminated and the stopped notification will be started. After that, the second progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4210).

When "1" is set in the first progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4203: YES), it is determined whether or not the game started this time is a game in the CB state (step S4211). When the game started this time is a game in the CB state (step S4211: YES), the irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S4212 and S4213. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped, and the state in which the stopped notification is executed is maintained.

When the game started this time is not a game in the CB state (step S4211: NO), the third control area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S4212). As a result, the execution of the stopped notification is terminated. In addition, the first progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4213). As a result, the state in which the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base production for the additional period will be resumed. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

When a negative determination is made in step S4204 or when the process of step S4213 is executed, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4214). When "1" is not set in the second progress stopped flag (step S4214: NO), it is determined whether or not the game in which the number of bets is "2" is the game started this time (step S4215). ..

When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is the game started this time (step S4215: YES), the selection process of the irregular data table is executed (step S4216). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of irregular data tables included in the irregular data table group 121 of the effect side ROM 93, the type of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 corresponds to. Select a type of irregular data table. Further, the current pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is grasped (step S4217). Then, among the first to fifth data tables in the irregular data table selected in step S4216, the data table set corresponding to the pointer information grasped in step S4217 is selected (step S4218). The selected data table is read from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the production side RAM 94 (step S4219). In this case, after clearing "0" in the fourth control area 122, the data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122. By storing the data table in the fourth control area 122, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the additional period, the irregular medium effect corresponding to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, as described above, the irregular medium effect is executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, "1" is set in the second progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4220). As a result, the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. Further, the irregular medium effect according to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 has priority over the base effect for the additional period according to the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112. Since it is executed, the base effect for the additional period is not executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When "1" is set in the second progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4214: YES), it is determined whether or not the game in which the number of bets is "2" is the game started this time. (Step S4221). When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is the game started this time (step S4221: YES), the irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S4222 and S4223. As a result, the state in which the irregular medium effect is executed instead of the base effect for the additional period is maintained.

When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is not the game started this time (step S4221: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared "0" (step S4222). As a result, the execution of the irregular production is completed. In addition, the second progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4223). As a result, the state in which the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base production for the additional period will be resumed. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process of the second control area 112 executed by the staging side MPU 92. The pointer update process of the second control area 112 is executed in step S3306 in the task process (FIG. 60).

When "1" is set in either the first progress stop flag or the second progress stop flag of the effecting side RAM 94 (step S4301: YES), the second step is performed without executing the process after step S4302. The pointer update process of the control area 112 is terminated. Therefore, when "1" is set in either the first progress stop flag or the second progress stop flag, the pointer information in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is not updated. ..

When "1" is not set in both the first progress stop flag and the second progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4301: NO), in the data table read to the second control area 112. A process for updating the pointer information to be referred to is executed (step S4302). Specifically, when the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the additional period data table is stored. Set the pointer information in the first order to the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the following order is newly referred to with respect to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information to be. Further, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the first order in the ending data table is stored. Is set in the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the execution control of the effect is started according to the ending data table stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the following order should be newly referred to with respect to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the data table (step S4303). If the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table exceeds the last-order pointer information in the additional period data table. Is determined. Further, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table exceeds the last-order pointer information in the ending data table. judge.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is set to the pointer information in the first order in the data table (step S4304). When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table is set as the pointer information in the first order in the additional period data table. When the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is set as the pointer information in the first order in the ending data table.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the irregular game game occurs in the situation where the base effect for the additional period is executed, the effect content is bet when the CB state game occurs as the irregular game game and when the non-CB state game occurs. It may be different from the case where the game in which the number is "2" occurs. As a result, if an irregular game game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the effect content can be set to correspond to the irregular game, and the effect content can be the type of irregular game. It becomes possible to correspond to. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the base effect for the additional period.

If a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, a stop notification is executed using the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time. If a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base effect for the additional period at that time occurs. Irregular production that does not use images is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped when the irregular game games occur continuously, and the irregular game game can be played. In a situation that can occur in a single shot, it is possible to make the player recognize that the base production for the additional period is continuing even if the base production for the additional period is not actually continued. ..

If a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, a stop notification using the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time is executed. If a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base for the additional period at that time occurs. The configuration is such that an irregular medium-sized production is executed without using the production image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base for the additional period at that time occurs. If a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the stop notification using the image of the effect is executed and the base effect for the additional period is executed, the base for the additional period at that time occurs. The configuration may be such that an irregular medium-sized production is executed without using the production image.

In addition, if a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base for the additional period at that time occurs. If a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the stop notification using the image of the effect is executed and the base effect for the additional period is executed, the base effect for the additional period ends. Then, the base effect for the AT state ST5 may be started.

In addition, if a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, a stop notification is executed using the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time. If a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base effect for the additional period ends. Then, the base effect for the AT state ST5 may be started.

In addition, if a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base for the additional period at that time occurs. If a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where an irregular medium effect that does not use the image of the effect is executed and a base effect for the additional period is executed, the base effect for the additional period is performed. It may be configured to be terminated and the base effect for the AT state ST5 to be started.

In addition, if a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, an irregular medium effect that does not use the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time is performed. If a game that is in a non-CB state and has a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where it is executed and the base effect for the additional period is executed, the base effect for the additional period is performed. It may be configured to be terminated and the base effect for the AT state ST5 to be started.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the effect in the situation where neither the addition period nor the ending period is performed in the AT state ST5 is different from the second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the second embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an AT state process at the start of the game in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. The AT state process at the start of the game is executed in step S2804 in the advantageous state process (FIG. 52) at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4401). Similar to the first embodiment, the first ending flag tells the main MPU 72 that the number of game executions in the second section SC2 measured by using the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the upper limit number of games. It is a flag to identify. As for the second ending flag, as in the first embodiment, it is highly possible that the limited total net increase number of game media measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the upper limit net increase number. This is a flag to be specified by the main MPU 72. If "1" is set in either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S4401: YES), the processing after step S4402 is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of times the game is executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or the situation where the total net increase number with restrictions on the game medium is likely to reach the upper limit net increase number, in step S4402 or later. The process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 will not be executed.

When "1" is not set in both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S4401: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the addition period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. , It is determined whether or not the current state is the addition period in the AT state ST5 (step S4402). The addition period counter is a counter for specifying whether or not it is an addition period and the number of continuous games remaining in the addition period on the main MPU 72. When the value of the addition period counter is 1 or more and it is the addition period (step S4402: YES), the process for the addition period is executed (step S4403). In the additional period processing, the same processing as in steps S3013 to S3021 in the AT state processing (FIG. 54) at the start of the game in the first embodiment is executed.

When the value of the addition period counter is "0" and not the addition period (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the addition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4404). .. The additional waiting counter is in a state where the transition to the additional period is waiting in the situation where it is confirmed that the transition to the additional period is made, and the number of games required until the transition to the additional period is made by the main MPU 72. It is a counter for identification.

When the value of the additional standby counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S4404: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (Step S4405: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S4406). In the addition period transition lottery process, the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5 by using the addition period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. It is decided by lottery whether or not to shift to the additional period in which is likely to occur. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 10% probability that the additional period will be transferred and the index value IV = 12 will be won. In that case, there is a 5% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 20% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and the index value IV = 14 is won. In that case, there is a 15% probability of winning the transition of the additional period, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 10% probability of winning the transition of the additional period. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition of the additional period. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition of the addition period is won (step S4407: YES), "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of addition transfer standby games, is set in the addition standby counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4408). After that, the additional standby command is transmitted to the staging side MPU 92 (step S4409). In order to make the player expect the player to shift to the additional period and to make the effecting MPU 92 recognize that the precursory period in which the effect indicating the final transition to the additional period should be started is executed. Command. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the addition standby command, the effect of the present precursor period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 over the number of addition transition standby games.

In this precursory period, as the effect content of each game on the image display device 63, it becomes easy to execute an effect with a high expectation of transition to the additional period. In addition, during this precursory period, the final game side is more flashy than the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of this precursory period, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect according to a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect for making the player recognize that the transition to the additional period will occur in the final game is displayed.

When an effect according to a series of stories is executed between a plurality of games to be executed during this precursory period, the effect according to the series of stories corresponds to each of the plurality of games and a plurality of effects. It is divided into ranges, and in each game included in the plurality of games, the effect of the corresponding effect range is executed. In this case, if the next game is not started for the predetermined game even though the end timing of the production range corresponding to the predetermined game is reached among the plurality of games, the next game is concerned. The still image at the end timing is continuously displayed on the image display device 63 until is started. In addition, when the next game is started for the predetermined game in a situation where the end timing of the production range corresponding to the predetermined game is not set among the plurality of games, the predetermined game is supported. The production range ends at that point, and the production of the production range corresponding to the next game is started.

If the transition to the additional period is not won (step S4407: NO), the occurrence lottery process for the false precursor period is executed (step S4410). Occurrence of false precursor period In the lottery process, whether or not to generate a false precursor period is drawn by using the false precursor lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Determined by. In the role lottery process (Fig. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that a false precursor period will occur and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If there is, there is a 10% chance that the false precursor period will occur, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 40% chance that the false precursor period will occur and the index value IV = 14 will be won. If this is the case, there is a 30% chance that the false precursor period will be won, and if the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a 20% chance that the false precursor period will be won. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning in the false precursor period.

Occurrence of false precursor period When the winner is won (step S4411: YES), the false precursor command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S4412). The false precursor command is a command for making the director MPU 92 recognize that the false precursor period should be started. When the production side MPU 92 receives the false precursor command, it is set as 10 games, which is the same number of games as the number of additional transition standby games, provided that the production of the false precursor period has not already started. The effect of the false precursor period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 over the number of precursor games.

In the false precursor period, as the effect content of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high expectation of transition to the additional period is likely to be executed. In addition, during the false precursor period, the final game side is more flashy than the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the false precursor period, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect according to a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect for making the player recognize that the transition to the additional period does not occur in the final game is displayed.

When an effect according to a series of stories is executed between a plurality of games that are the targets of execution of the false precursor period, the effect according to the series of stories corresponds to each of the plurality of games and a plurality of effects. It is divided into ranges, and in each game included in the plurality of games, the effect of the corresponding effect range is executed. In this case, if the next game is not started for the predetermined game even though the end timing of the production range corresponding to the predetermined game is reached among the plurality of games, the next game is concerned. The still image at the end timing is continuously displayed on the image display device 63 until is started. In addition, when the next game is started for the predetermined game in a situation where the end timing of the production range corresponding to the predetermined game is not set among the plurality of games, the predetermined game is supported. The production range ends at that point, and the production of the production range corresponding to the next game is started.

The effect performed in the false precursor period can also be executed in the present precursor period. Therefore, if a production with a high expectation of transition to the additional period frequently occurs between a plurality of games, the player expects this to be the precursory period. In addition, as a part of the effect that can be executed in this precursor period, the composition may include an effect that is executed in the present precursor period but not executed in the false precursor period, and the probability of occurrence in this precursor period is used. However, it may be configured to include an effect higher than the probability of occurrence in the false precursor period.

Occurrence of false precursor period If the winning is not achieved (step S4411: NO), other processing is executed (step S4413). In other processes, the same processes as in steps S3009 to S3012 of the AT state process (FIG. 54) at the start of the game in the first embodiment are executed.

When the value of the additional standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more and this precursor period is reached (step S4404: YES), the value of the additional standby counter is decremented by 1 (step S4414). Then, when the value of the addition standby counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4415: YES), the addition process of the number of continuous games is executed (step S4416). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the additional period will continue is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. Specifically, the addition period will continue for 10 games, but in step S4416, 20 games, which is the number of games of the 10 games or more, is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of continuous games remaining in the AT state ST5 from becoming "0" in the middle of the addition period.

After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S4417). The first addition command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition of the number of games has occurred at the time of transition to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the effect indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. do. After that, "1" is set in the additional winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4418). When the additional winning flag is set to "1", a process for shifting to the additional period is executed when the current game ends, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups 101 to 104, 121, 125 provided in the effect side ROM 93 of the present embodiment.

In the production side ROM 93, various table groups 101 to 104, 121, 125 are used as the AT data table group 101, the additional period data table group 102, the ending data table group 103, and the game, as in the second embodiment. The data table group 104 and the irregular data table group 121 are stored in advance, and the precursor data table group 125 is stored in advance.

The precursor data table group 125 includes a plurality of types of present precursor data tables and a plurality of types of false precursor data tables. In the data table for this precursor, data for controlling the execution of the base effect for this precursor period is set in this precursor period. Specifically, in the data table for precursors, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence like other data tables, and a combination of image data, audio data, and light emission data is associated with each pointer information. Is set. A plurality of types of data tables for precursors are provided corresponding to each number of games included in the number of additional transition waiting games.

That is, a plurality of types of data tables for precursors are provided corresponding to 10 games, which is the number of additional transition waiting games, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors correspond to the precursor period for 10 games. Data for controlling the execution of the effect is set. These multiple types of data tables for precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for 10 games.

Multiple types of data tables for precursors are provided for 9 games, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors are used to control the execution of effects corresponding to the precursor periods for 9 games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for nine games.

Multiple types of data tables for precursors are provided for eight games, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors are used to control the execution of effects corresponding to the precursor periods for eight games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for eight games.

Multiple types of data tables for precursors are provided for 7 games, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors are used to control the execution of effects corresponding to the precursor periods for 7 games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for seven games.

Multiple types of data tables for precursors are provided for 6 games, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors are used to control the execution of effects corresponding to the precursor periods for 6 games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for 6 games.

Multiple types of data tables for the precursors are provided for the five games, and these multiple types of data tables for the precursors are data for controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the precursor period for the five games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for five games.

Multiple types of data tables for the precursors are provided corresponding to the four games, and these multiple types of data tables for the precursors are data for controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the precursor period for the four games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for four games.

Multiple types of data tables for the precursors are provided corresponding to the three games, and these multiple types of data tables for the precursors are data for controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the precursor period for the three games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for three games.

Multiple types of data tables for precursors are provided for two games, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors are used to control the execution of effects corresponding to the precursor periods for two games. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor periods for two games.

Multiple types of data tables for precursors are provided corresponding to one game, and these multiple types of data tables for precursors are used to control the execution of effects corresponding to the precursor period for one game. Is set. These multiple types of data tables for the precursors differ in at least a part of the production contents of the effects corresponding to the precursor period for one game.

Details will be described later, but if an irregular game occurs in the middle of this precursory period, the production of this precursory period that had been executed up to that point will end, and the irregular game will end and bet in a non-CB state. When a game whose number is "3" is started, this precursor period corresponding to the remaining number of games until the transition to the additional period at that time is newly started. In this case, as described above, since a plurality of types of data tables for precursors are provided corresponding to each number of games included in the number of additional transition waiting games, the game is executed over the number of additional transition waiting games. Not only the precursory period, but also the effect corresponding to the newly started precursory period after the end of the precursory period due to the occurrence of irregular games in the middle of the precursory period is preferably performed. It becomes possible to do.

In the false precursor data table, data for controlling the execution of the base effect for the false precursor period is set in the false precursor period. Specifically, in the false precursor data table, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence like other data tables, and a combination of image data, audio data, and light emission data is associated with each pointer information. Is set. The false precursor data table is provided corresponding to 10 games, which is the same number of games as the number of additional transition waiting games, and is not provided corresponding to the number of other games.

In the present precursor period, the present precursor data table is read out in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. The base effect for the present precursor is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the data table for the present precursor. Further, during the false precursor period, the false precursor data table is read out in the second control area 112 of the effecting side RAM 94. The base effect for false precursors is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the false precursor data table.

The irregular data table group 121 includes a plurality of types of irregular data tables. As a data table for irregularity, as in the second embodiment, when an irregular game occurs during the addition period, the execution control of the irregular middle effect that is executed instead of the base effect for the addition period is performed. An irregular data table is provided. Similar to the second embodiment, a plurality of types of irregular data tables used when an irregular game occurs during the addition period are provided. The contents of the irregular data table are the same as those in the second embodiment.

As an irregular data table, when an irregular game occurs in the main precursor period or the false precursor period, the execution control of the irregular medium effect that is executed instead of the base effect for the main precursor or the base effect for the false precursor is controlled. There is an irregular data table to do this. Only one type of irregular data table is provided when an irregular game occurs during the present precursor period or the false precursor period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of irregular data tables may be provided. In this case, an irregular data table to be referred to when an irregular game occurs in the present precursor period and an irregular data table to be referred to when an irregular game occurs in the false precursor period are provided. It may be configured as such. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand whether the current irregular game occurred in the present precursor period or the false precursor period depending on the execution content of the irregular medium effect. In addition, an irregular data table that is likely to be a reference target when an irregular game occurs during this precursory period and an irregular data table that is likely to be a reference target when an irregular game occurs during the false precursor period are provided. It may be configured as such. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict which of the present precursor period and the false precursor period is higher in the irregular game this time depending on the execution content of the irregular medium effect.

The irregular data table is read out to the fourth control area 122 of the effect side RAM 94 in the same manner as in the second embodiment. By controlling the execution of the effect according to the irregular data table, the irregular effect is executed. The fourth control area 122 is set to have a higher priority than the second control area 112 as in the second embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for AT in the present embodiment executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

When the additional standby command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4501: YES), the selection process of the precursor data table is executed (step S4502). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of the precursor data tables included in the precursor data table group 125 of the effect side ROM 93, the precursor data table to be referred to in the present precursor period is determined by lottery. In this case, a plurality of types of data tables for precursors provided corresponding to 10 games, which is the number of additional transition waiting games, are subject to the lottery. At the time of lottery, a reference target determination table stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of each of the plurality of types of data tables for precursors provided corresponding to the 10 games are the same.

After that, the data table for the precursor of the type selected in step S4502 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4503). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the present precursor data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112. By storing the present precursor data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the present precursor data table, and the base effect for the present precursor period is executed.

After that, "1" is set in the precursor flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4504), and the precursor counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to a value corresponding to the number of continuous games during the present precursor period. "(Step S4505). This precursor flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that it is the present precursor period, and the precursor counter determines the number of games remaining in the precursor period when it is either the present precursor period or the false precursor period. It is a counter for specifying by the directing side MPU 92. When "1" is set in this precursor flag, the value of the precursor counter is subtracted by "1" every time one game is completed.

When a false precursor command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4506: YES), on condition that "1" is not set in the false precursor flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4507: NO). Perform the process to start the false precursor period. The false precursor flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that it is a false precursor period. Since the main MPU 72 cannot grasp whether or not the effect corresponding to the false precursor period is being executed, the false precursor command can be transmitted even while the effect corresponding to the false precursor period is being executed. On the other hand, when the effecting side MPU 92 is already executing the effect corresponding to the false precursor period, even if a new false precursor command is received, the effect corresponding to the already executing false precursor period is continued. , The newly received false precursor command will not trigger a new production corresponding to the false precursor period.

Specifically, as a process for starting the false precursor period, first, a selection process of the precursor data table is executed (step S4508). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of false precursor data tables included in the precursor data table group 125 of the effect side ROM 93, the false precursor data table to be referred to in the current false precursor period is determined by lottery. At the time of lottery, a reference target determination table stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of each of the multiple types of false precursor data tables are the same.

After that, the false precursor data table of the type selected in step S4508 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4509). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the false precursor data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112. By storing the false precursor data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the false precursor data table, and the base effect for the false precursor period is executed. After that, "1" is set in the false precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4510), and "10" corresponding to the number of continuous games and the same number of games in the present precursor period is set in the precursor counter of the effect side RAM 94. Set (step S4511). When "1" is set in the false precursor flag, the value of the precursor counter is subtracted by "1" every time one game is completed.

If the process of step S4505 is executed, the negative determination is made in step S4506, the negative determination is made in step S4507, or the process of step S4511 is executed, if it is not an additional period (step S4512: NO), on condition that the start command of the addition period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4513: YES), the selection process of the data table for the addition period is executed (step S4514). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of additional period data tables included in the additional period data table group 102 on the effect side ROM 93, the additional period data table to be referred to in the current additional period is determined by lottery. At the time of this lottery, a reference target determination table stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of each of the multiple types of data tables for the additional period are the same.

After that, the data table for the addition period of the type selected in step S4514 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4515). In this case, after clearing "0" in the second control area 112, the data table for the addition period of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112. As a result, even if the precursor data table is stored in the second control area 112, the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112 after it is deleted. By storing the additional period data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the additional period data table, and the base effect for the additional period is executed. After that, the main precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4516).

When the start command of the addition period has not been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4513: NO), the effect is provided on condition that "1" is set in the false precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4517: YES). It is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter of the side RAM 94 is “0” (step S4518).

When the value of the precursor counter is "0" (step S4518: YES), the false precursor flag of the effecting side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4519). Further, the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" (step S4520). As a result, the false precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 is deleted.

In the case of the addition period (step S4512: YES), the second control area 112 of the staging side RAM 94 is set to "0" on condition that the end command of the addition period is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4521: YES). Clear (step S4522). When the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the execution control of the effect according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is restarted, and the base effect of the AT state ST5 is executed. .. After that, "1" is set in the addition period end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4523). The addition period end flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to grasp that the situation is after the addition period has ended.

When the process of step S4516 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4517, when a negative determination is made in step S4518, when the process of step S4520 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4521, or step. When the process of S4523 is executed, after executing the irregular process at the time of precursor (step S4524), other processes are executed (step S4525). In other processes, the same processes as in steps S3216 to S3219 in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 59) in the first embodiment are executed. In the irregular processing in step S3217, the irregular processing (FIG. 75) in the second embodiment is executed.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an irregular processing at the time of precursor, which is executed in step S4524 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 81).

When "1" is set in this precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4601: YES), on condition that the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4602: YES), the effect side RAM 94 It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the precursor stop flag provided in (step S4603). The precursor stop flag is a flag for the staging side MPU 92 to specify that the progress of the base effect for the present precursor period is stopped.

When "1" is not set in the precursor stop flag (step S4603: NO), whether or not the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Determination (step S4604). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game.

When this game is an irregular game (step S4604: YES), the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" (step S4605). As a result, the data table for precursors stored in the second control area 112 is deleted. Therefore, the execution of the base production for this precursory period is terminated in the middle.

After that, the selection process of the irregular data table is executed (step S4606). In the selection process, one type of irregular data table provided in response to the occurrence of an irregular game during the present precursor period or the false precursor period is selected. Then, the selected irregular data table is read from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the production side RAM 94 (step S4607). In this case, after clearing "0" in the fourth control area 122, the irregular data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122. By storing the irregular data table in the fourth control area 122, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the irregular data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the present precursor period, the irregular medium effect corresponding to the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, the irregular medium effect is executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, "1" is set in the precursor stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4608).

When "1" is set in the precursor stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4603: YES), the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. Whether or not it is determined (step S4609). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game. If the game this time is an irregular game (step S4609: YES), the processes of steps S4610 to S4613 are not executed. As a result, the state in which the irregular medium effect is executed instead of the base effect for this precursor period is maintained.

If the game this time is not an irregular game (step S4609: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4610). As a result, the execution of the irregular production is completed. In addition, the selection process of the precursor data table is executed (step S4611). In the selection process, first, the number of games remaining in the precursor period is grasped based on the value of the precursor counter of the effect side RAM 94. Then, among the plurality of types of data tables for precursors included in the precursor data table group 125 of the production side ROM 93, a plurality of types of data tables for precursors provided corresponding to the number of games remaining in the precursor period are drawn by lottery. As a target, the data table for this precursor to be referred to is determined by lottery. At the time of lottery, a reference target determination table stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 and a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of the plurality of types of data tables for precursors provided corresponding to each game are the same. As a result, the data table for the precursor corresponding to the number of games remaining in the precursor period is selected.

After that, the data table for the precursor of the type selected in step S4611 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4612). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the present precursor data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112. By storing the present precursor data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the present precursor data table, and the base effect for the present precursor period is newly started. After that, the precursor stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4613).

When "1" is set in the false precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4614: YES), on condition that the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4615: YES), the effect side RAM 94 It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the precursor end flag provided in (step S4616). The precursor end flag is a flag for the director MPU 92 to specify that the base effect for the false precursor period is terminated by the occurrence of an irregular game.

When "1" is not set in the precursor end flag (step S4616: NO), it is determined whether the game started this time is either a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. (Step S4617). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game.

When this game is an irregular game (step S4617: YES), the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" (step S4618). As a result, the false precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 is deleted. Therefore, the execution of the base effect for the false precursor period is terminated in the middle.

After that, the selection process of the irregular data table is executed (step S4619). In the selection process, one type of irregular data table provided in response to the occurrence of an irregular game during the present precursor period or the false precursor period is selected. Then, the selected irregular data table is read from the production side ROM 93 as a reference target and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the production side RAM 94 (step S4620). In this case, after clearing "0" in the fourth control area 122, the irregular data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122. By storing the irregular data table in the fourth control area 122, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the irregular data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the false precursor period, the irregular medium effect corresponding to the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, the irregular medium effect is executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, "1" is set in the precursor end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4621).

When "1" is set in the precursor end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4616: YES), whether the game started this time is a game in which the number of bets is "2" or a game in the CB state. It is determined whether or not (step S4622). That is, it is determined whether or not this game is an irregular game. When the current game is an irregular game (step S4622: YES), the irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S4623 to S4625. As a result, the state in which the irregular medium effect is executed instead of the base effect for the false precursor period is maintained.

If the game this time is not an irregular game (step S4622: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4623). As a result, the execution of the irregular production is completed. Further, the precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4624), and the false precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4625).

Next, an execution mode of the effect when an irregular game occurs in the middle of the present precursor period or the false precursor period will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 83 (a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 83 (b) shows the situation of the present precursor period or the false precursor period, and FIG. 83 (c) shows the situation of the additional period, FIG. 83 (d). ) Indicates the period during which the pointer information to be referred to in the main precursor data table or the false precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 can be updated, and FIG. 83 (e) shows an irregular game (the number of bets is "". 2 ”and the CB state game) are being executed, and FIG. 83 (f) shows that the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 can be updated. Indicates the period.

First, a case where an irregular game occurs in the middle of a false aura period will be described.

At the timing of t1, a new game is started in the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 83 (a). If any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game, the transfer of the additional period is executed in the transfer lottery process (step S4406). Although it was not, the false precursor period is generated and won in the lottery process (step S4410). Therefore, at the timing of t1, the false precursor period starts as shown in FIG. 83 (b). In this case, the false precursor command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, so that the false precursor data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. Then, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the false precursor data table can be updated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83A, the current game ends at the timing of t2, and a new game is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. The game is not an irregular game like the game of the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the false precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated, so that the base effect for the false precursor period progresses. It becomes.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 83 (a). Since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2", it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 83 (e). Therefore, at the timing of t5, which is the timing at which the game is started, the false precursor period is terminated as shown in FIG. 83 (b), and is stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 83 (d). The false precursor data table that has been set is deleted.

Further, the irregular data table corresponding to the present precursor period or the false precursor period is stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect side RAM 94 at the timing of t5. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table can be updated. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying the moving image corresponding to the irregular medium effect. As the moving image display corresponding to the irregular medium effect, for example, the display as shown in FIG. 74 (a) or FIG. 74 (b) is performed. Further, the speaker 62 starts to output the sound corresponding to the irregular medium effect, and the upper lamp 61 starts the light emission corresponding to the irregular medium effect. The state in which this irregular medium effect is executed is continued until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game by the irregular game is finished, the state in which the irregular production is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 83 (a). The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is deleted at the timing of t7, which is the start timing of the current game. This ends the irregular production. Further, as described above, the false precursor data table is deleted from the second control area 112 at the timing of t5, which is the timing when the irregular game occurred last time, and the false precursor data table is not read again. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111.

Next, a case where an irregular game occurs in the middle of this precursory period will be described.

At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 83A, a new game is started in the AT state ST5. Transition of the additional period executed by winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 in the lottery process of the winning combination in the game (FIG. 16) The transition of the additional period is won in the lottery process (step S4406). .. Therefore, at the timing of t9, this precursory period starts as shown in FIG. 83 (b). In this case, the additional standby command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92, so that the main precursor data to be referred to from among a plurality of types of present precursor data tables provided for 10 games. The table is determined by lottery, and the determined data table for precursors is read out to the second control area 112. Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the precursor data table can be updated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83A, the current game ends at the timing of t10, and a new game is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. The game is not an irregular game like the game of the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the present precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated, so that the base effect for the present precursor period progresses. It becomes.

After that, a new game is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 83 (a). Since the game is in the CB state, it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 83 (e). Therefore, at the timing of t13, which is the timing at which the game is started, the data table for precursors stored in the second control area 112 is deleted as shown in FIG. 83 (d). As a result, the base effect for this precursory period is temporarily terminated at the timing of t13. However, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), since this precursory period is not terminated, the situation in which the transition to the additional period is confirmed is maintained.

Further, the irregular data table corresponding to the present precursor period or the false precursor period is stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect side RAM 94 at the timing of t13. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table can be updated. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying the moving image corresponding to the irregular medium effect. As the moving image display corresponding to the irregular medium effect, for example, the display as shown in FIG. 74 (a) or FIG. 74 (b) is performed. Further, the speaker 62 starts to output the sound corresponding to the irregular medium effect, and the upper lamp 61 starts the light emission corresponding to the irregular medium effect. The state in which this irregular medium effect is executed is continued until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state and a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game by the irregular game is finished, the state in which the irregular production is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

After that, a plurality of games are executed in the CB state including the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. That is, each of the plurality of games in the CB state including the timing of t15 to the timing of t16 is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 83 (e). Therefore, the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is updated as shown in FIG. 83 (f) from the timing of t13 to the timing of t17. As a result, the irregular production will proceed.

The CB state ends at the timing of t16. Then, as shown in FIG. 83A, the first game after the CB state ends is executed from t17 to t18. The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is deleted at the timing of t17, which is the start timing of the current game. This ends the irregular production.

Further, the data table for precursors is read out again to the second control area 112 at the timing of t17, which is the start timing of this game. In this case, at the timing of t13, which is the timing when the base effect for this precursor period is once ended due to the occurrence of an irregular game, the game is in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3" in this precursor period. Since the number of executions is 2, the number of games remaining in this precursor period at the timing of t17 is 8 games. Therefore, the data table for the precursors to be referred to is determined by lottery from among the plurality of types of data tables for the precursors provided corresponding to the eight games, and the determined data table for the precursors is the second. It is read out to the control area 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the present precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated. As a result, this precursory production will be newly started. This sign production corresponds to 8 games, which is the number of games remaining in the sign period.

After that, in this precursory period including the timing of t19 to t20, the game in the non-CB state and the bet number is "3" is executed eight times. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (d), the pointer information to be referred to in the precursor data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated. As a result, the base production for this precursory period will proceed. Then, at the timing of t20, which is the end timing of the eighth game, the precursory period ends and the addition period starts as shown in FIGS. 83 (b) and 83 (c). In this case, at the timing of t20, after the precursor base table stored in the second control area 112 is erased, the additional period base table is read out to the second control area 112. As a result, the base production for the precursory period is completed and the base production for the additional period is started.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a game of irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the present precursor period or the base effect for the false precursor period is executed, the running base effect is terminated in the middle. As a result, when a game of irregular game occurs, it is possible to prevent the base effect for the present precursor period or the base effect for the false precursor period from being continued. In addition, when a game of irregular game occurs, the base effect for the main precursor period or the base effect for the false precursor period is not temporarily stopped in the middle, but the running base effect ends in the middle. Therefore, after the game of irregular game is finished, the production is newly started. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand the effect content of the effect executed after the game of the irregular game is finished.

If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the precursory period is being executed, the base effect for the precursory period being executed is terminated halfway, and the irregular game game is terminated. If this happens, a new base production for this precursory period will be started. As a result, when the game of irregular games is completed, it becomes possible to provide the player with a new base effect for the precursory period.

If the base production for this precursor period is newly started due to the end of the irregular game, the base for this precursor period will be the production content corresponding to the number of continuous games remaining in the precursor period. The effect is selected and executed. This makes it possible to prevent the precursory period from becoming excessively long due to the occurrence of irregular game games, and at the same time, it is possible to predict the content of the base production for the newly started precursory period. It is possible to make the production content according to the number of continuous games remaining in the period.

Even if a game of irregular game occurs in this precursory period, the number of continuous games remaining in this precursory period does not decrease. This makes it possible to prevent the number of games during this precursory period from being reduced due to the occurrence of irregular game games.

If an irregular game game occurs while the base effect for the false precursor period is being executed, the base effect for the false precursor period is terminated halfway, and the irregular game game is terminated. However, the base production for the false precursor period will not start. As a result, the base production for the false precursor period, which is not directly linked to the granting of profits, can be completely terminated with the occurrence of the irregular game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given no profit in the end even though the base effect for the false precursor period is executed again after the game of the irregular game is finished.

In addition, the base production for the false precursor period is continued as it is even if the game of irregular game occurs, and the number of games of the false precursor period set when the false precursor period is started is the number of games of irregular game. The base production for the false precursor period may be terminated when the game is digested. That is, in the configuration, the base effect for the present precursor period is terminated when the game of irregular game occurs, whereas the base effect for the false precursor period is assumed to occur when the game of irregular game occurs. Will be continued.

In addition, if an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the precursory period is being executed, the base effect for the precursory period is not limited to the configuration that ends at that time. For example, the image at the timing when the irregular game game occurs continues to be displayed as a still image as in the stopped notification of the first embodiment, and the present precursor such as the progress stopped image G71 and the dark color display state G72. It may be configured to be in a display state suggesting that the progress of the base effect for the period has been stopped.

In addition, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the precursory period is being executed, a stop notification as in the first embodiment is notified. When the game is executed and a game in the CB state occurs as an irregular game, the base effect for this precursory period may be terminated. In addition, when a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the precursory period is being executed, a stop notification as in the first embodiment is executed, and the game is irregular. When a game in which the number of bets is "2" occurs as a game of the game, the base effect for this precursory period may be terminated.

Further, even if an irregular game game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the precursory period is being executed, the bass effect for the precursory period may be continued as it is. In this case, since the number of games in the precursory period is not digested even if the game of the irregular game is executed, the base production for the precursory period is completed before the number of games in the precursory period is digested. .. Therefore, after the base production for the precursory period is completed and until the number of games in the precursory period is exhausted, the effect indicating that the transition to the additional period is waiting is executed. It shall be configured. As a result, even if the base production for the precursory period is completed before the number of games in the precursory period is exhausted, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the contents of each of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations of different embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) As an irregular game, a game in which the number of bets is "2" and a game in the CB state are set, but the game is not limited to this, for example, the number of bets is "2". Even if a certain game is set as an irregular game and the game is in the CB state, the game in which the number of bets is "3" may not be set as the irregular game. Further, the game in the CB state is set as the game of the irregular game, and the game in the non-CB state and the number of bets is "2" may not be set as the game of the irregular game.

(2) When the game of the irregular game occurs in the situation where the base effect for the additional period or the base effect for the ending period is executed, the execution mode of the stopped notification is that the game of the irregular game occurs. The mode is not limited to the mode in which the dark color display state G72 in which the image at the timing is displayed dimly and the progress stopped image G71 is displayed. For example, the dark color display state G72 may be displayed while the progress / stop image G71 may not be displayed, or the progress / stop image G71 may be displayed but not the dark color display state G72. Further, when the stopped notification is executed in the other embodiment or each of the above embodiments, the dark color display state G72 is not obtained, and the image at the timing when the irregular game game occurs is one of the image display devices 63. The image may be reduced in size in the area of the unit, and an image indicating that the progress of the base effect for the additional period or the base effect for the ending period is stopped may be displayed in the remaining area.

(3) The base effect for the ending period is not limited to the configuration in which even if the first ending command or the second ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72, it is not started until the AT state ST5 is reached, and the main MPU 72 When the first ending command or the second ending command is transmitted from, the base effect for the ending period may be started regardless of whether or not the AT state is ST5. In this case, even if the first ending command or the second ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 in the middle of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the base effect for the ending period is started. ..

(4) If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is being executed, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is executed, and then a. When the regular game is over and a target game with a bet number of "3" occurs in a non-CB state, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is restarted. May be.

(5) The sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is the second section. The value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 is not limited to the configuration in which the base effect for the ending period is started when the number of games exceeds the upper limit of SC2 and is in the AT state ST5. When the sum of the value and the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of games in the second section SC2 and the AT state is ST5, the base effect for the ending period is started. It may be configured as such. Further, when it is determined that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5, the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied is the predetermined number of games. When it becomes (for example, 20 games), the base effect for the ending period may be started. In this case, in the base production for the ending period, it is preferable that the production according to a series of stories is executed over the predetermined number of games.

(6) The value obtained by integrating the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter with the expected acquisition value of the game medium in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. The value of the AT continuation counter is not limited to the configuration in which the base effect for the ending period is started when the result is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 and the AT state is ST5. In the AT state ST5, the result of adding the value obtained by accumulating the expected acquisition values of the game media in the AT state ST5 to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2. In some cases, the base effect for the ending period may be started.

(7) Regardless of whether the additional period data table or the ending data table is read in the second control area 112, the AT data table read in the first control area 111 is the last. The pointer information to be referred to is continuously updated until the pointer information in the order of is the reference target, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the additional period data table is read in the second control area 112, until the pointer information in the last order in the AT data table read in the first control area 111 becomes a reference target. Continues to update the pointer information to be referred to, whereas when the ending data table is read in the second control area 112, the AT data table read in the first control area 111 The pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table may not be updated regardless of whether or not the pointer information in the last order is the reference target. When the base effect for the ending period is executed, it does not return to the state where the base effect for the AT state ST5 is executed until the end of the second section SC2 of this time, so this situation. By preventing the pointer information to be referenced from being updated in the AT data table, it is possible to prevent the pointer information to be referenced from being updated unnecessarily.

Further, when the ending data table is read out to the second control area 112, the AT data table is deleted from the first control area 111 by clearing "0" in the first control area 111 at that time. It may be configured as such. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the pointer information to be referred from being updated unnecessarily.

(8) When the additional period data table is read in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the last order in the AT data table read in the first control area 111 is referred to. Until then, the pointer information to be referred to is continuously updated, and after the pointer information in the last order is the reference target, a new update cycle is not started, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the additional period data table is read in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table read in the first control area 111 is continuously updated. May be good. In this case, when the pointer information in the last order is the reference target in the AT data table, a new update cycle is started after that.

(9) When the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411), the value of the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1, and the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is added by 1. The configuration is not limited, and if the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411), the number of games to be added is a plurality of candidate games (for example, 1 game, 5 games, and 10 games). The configuration may be determined by lottery from among the above.

(10) Occurrence of loop lottery When the winning is generated in the lottery process (step S3014), the addition lottery process (step S3411) is performed regardless of whether or not the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411). May be executed a plurality of predetermined times (for example, 1000 times). In this case, even if the addition lottery process (step S3411) does not result in the addition winning, the addition lottery process (step S3411) is performed until the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed a plurality of times predetermined. The situation to be executed will continue. Further, in the configuration, when the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411), the value of the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1, so that the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is 1. It may be configured to be added, and when the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411), the number of games to be added is the number of candidate games (for example, 1 game, 5 games and 10 games). The configuration may be determined by lottery from among them.

(11) In the additional lottery process (step S3411), the process for determining whether or not the state in which the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed is continued is not executed by the lottery, but the addition target. A process of determining the number of games to be played by lottery from a plurality of candidate games (for example, 1 game, 5 games, and 10 games) may be executed. In this case, in the case of winning in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), the addition lottery process (step S3411) is performed until the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed by the end reference number. The state of execution will continue.

(12) Additional effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. Is not limited to the configuration in which a new stop command is generated for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, a new stop for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to or instead of the command being generated, the additional effect may be executed when the pressing operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for generating the stop command is released. Further, the additional effect may be executed when the acceleration period of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed rotation is achieved, and the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. The above-mentioned additional effect may be executed when the game is completed, or the above-mentioned additional effect may be executed when the game is completed.

(13) Occurrence of loop lottery Occurrence in the lottery process (step S3014) In the case of winning, the situation where the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated is the occurrence. The configuration is such that the game ends within the range of the winning game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated. May be configured to continue over a plurality of games. In this case, in the second and subsequent games, the additional lottery process (step S3411) executed from the occurrence of the last notification trigger in the previous game to the start of a new game based on the operation of the start lever 41. The number of games given based on the result may be notified when the new game is started.

Further, the situation where the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started due to the occurrence of the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) continues. In this case, even between the end of one game and the start of the next game, the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated. May be. In this case, the number of games given based on the result of the additional lottery process (step S3411) executed until the next game is started is notified when the next game is started. May be good.

Further, the situation where the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated due to the occurrence winning in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) continues. Even in this case, the additional lottery process (step S3411) may not be executed from the end of one game to the start of the next game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 from increasing in a situation where the game has not been digested by the player.

(14) Occurrence of loop lottery When the occurrence is won in the lottery process (step S3014), the additional lottery process (step S3411) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be executed a plurality of times each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated.

Further, when the generation winning is achieved in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be executed regardless of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). In this case, the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be executed periodically, or the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be executed at an irregular cycle.

(15) The AT state ST5 is not limited to the configuration in which the game ends when the number of remaining continuous games becomes "0", and the AT state ST5 has a net increase in the number of games as an end condition ("AT state ST5 continues". The game is executed in the situation where the AT state ST5 is continued from the total number of game media given by the game executed in the situation (“0” in the situation where the game medium is not given). The total number of game media digested for this purpose (value obtained by subtracting "0" in the situation where the game is not executed) ") is set, and the AT state when the remaining net increase number becomes" 0 ". The configuration may be such that ST5 ends. In this case, if a lottery is generated in the loop lottery process (step S3014), the remaining net increase is increased each time the additional lottery process (step S3411) results in an additional winning. Then, when a notification trigger occurs, the increase in the remaining net increase number is notified.

Further, the AT state ST5 may be configured so that the number of game media to be granted is set as an end condition, and the AT state ST5 is terminated when the remaining number of grants becomes "0". In this case, if the occurrence of the loop lottery is achieved in the lottery process (step S3014), the remaining number of grants will be increased each time the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411). Then, when a notification trigger occurs, the increase in the remaining number of granted sheets is notified.

(16) In a game that is not the final game of the transition waiting period (that is, the transition game to the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is out of order, and the result is middle → right → left or Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of middle → left → right, by setting the execution mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as the avoidance execution mode, “Red 7” The combination of the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol and the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol may not be stopped and displayed. As a result, even though it is not the final game of the transition waiting period, if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is out of order, the combination of symbols suggesting the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4 is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

Further, in a game that is not the final game of the transition waiting period (that is, a transition game to the pseudo bonus state ST4), the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is the case where the index value IV = 16 is won. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of right → left or middle → left → right, the execution mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is set as the avoidance execution mode. , "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol combination and "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination may not be stopped and displayed. .. As a result, even though it is not the final game of the transition waiting period, if the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is won with the index value IV = 16, a symbol suggesting the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST4. It is possible to prevent the combination of the above from being stopped and displayed.

(17) Pseudo-bonus state that becomes a big bonus In the situation where the transition to ST4 is confirmed, the result of the lottery process (Fig. 16) of the winning combination in the final game of the transition waiting period is the winning or losing result with the index value IV = 16. If the reel effect is executed after the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed in the case of In the reel production, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol) is on the main line ML after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. The stop display may be displayed on the screen, and then the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be restarted. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) has been stopped and displayed. Become.

(18) Pseudo-bonus state that becomes a big bonus In the situation where the transition to ST4 is confirmed, the result of the lottery process (Fig. 16) of the role in the final game of the transition waiting period is the winning or losing result with the index value IV = 16. Stop of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) when When the order is notified, whether or not the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed according to the notified stop order and the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (“Red 7” symbol, “Red 7” Regardless of whether or not the combination of symbols and "BAR" symbols) is stopped and displayed, the reel effect is subsequently executed and the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus ("Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and The combination of "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed, but the configuration is not limited to this.

For example, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is notified. On the condition that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, the reel effect is subsequently executed and the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus ("" A combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the reel effect from being executed for a player who does not follow the notification of the stop order.

In addition, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that makes it possible to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is notified. On the condition that the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed, the reel effect is performed after that. The combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol) may be stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to provide a reel effect as an effect of converting into a combination of symbols suggesting that an advantageous pseudo-bonus state ST4 is given.

(19) Combination of symbols corresponding to big bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol) or combination of symbols corresponding to regular bonus ("red 7" symbol, "red" 7 ”The combination of the“ symbol ”and the“ BAR ”symbol) is configured to be notified only in the final game of the transition waiting period, but it is not limited to this and will eventually occur in the transition waiting period. Even in the game of, if the index value IV = 16 is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 16), or if the result is out of the game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus ("Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol Notification that enables stop display of the combination of "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) or the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) May be executed. In this case, it corresponds to the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) or regular bonus in the game before the final game in the transition waiting period. When the combination of symbols (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed, the remaining transition waiting period until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In the game, an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed may be executed.

Also, in the transition waiting period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) or the symbol corresponding to the regular bonus in the game before the final game. When the notification that enables the stop display of the combination of ("Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "BAR" symbol combination) is executed, but the combination of the symbols cannot be stopped and displayed. May be configured such that the above notification is executed again when the winning combination is won at the index value IV = 16 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the subsequent game in the transition waiting period, or when the result is out of order. .. As a result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus ("Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol combination) or a combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus ("Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol) It is possible to increase the chances that "7" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) will be stopped and displayed.

(20) If an irregular game occurs in the middle of the base production for the additional period, the base production for the ending period, the base production for the main precursor period, or the base production for the false precursor period, the execution of those base effects. Is stopped and the effects corresponding to the irregular games are executed, but the update of the pointer information of the data table for executing and controlling the base effects may be continued. In this case, when the irregular game is completed, the progress of the base effect is restarted from the timing in which the pointer update is continued while the irregular game is being executed.

(21) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one of the main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the number of effective lines is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of effective lines may increase as the number of bet game media increases, or the maximum number of valid lines may be set regardless of the number of bet game media.

(22) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92. In this case, it is possible to notify the information on the number of game media given by winning a prize on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information is on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92. In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege of paying out medals when a small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and some privilege is given to the player. It should be. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(24) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and a C type, an A type and a C type composite type, a B type and a C type composite type, and an RT game, a CT game, or an AT may be applied. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game. Further, the configuration may be such that a bonus state advantageous to the player exists.

(25) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape, or the like, and even a composite of these can be used to compose the design. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine may be applied. It may be applied to a gaming machine in a form fused with the machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. When a predetermined target game (a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3") is executed, a predetermined production period (in the first to third embodiments, an additional period) is used over a plurality of games. The staging execution means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image) so that the base staging and the base staging for the ending period, and in the fourth embodiment, the base staging for the present precursor period and the base staging for the false precursor period) are generated. A function for executing the processes of step S3207, step S3208, step S3908 and step S3909 in the effect side MPU 92 in the predetermined effect control means for controlling the display device 63) (in the first to third embodiments, the effect in the fourth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S4502, step S4503, step S4508, and step S4509) in the side MPU 92).
When a predetermined non-target game (a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or a game in the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period continues. Non-target correspondence control means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S3705 to S3707 on the staging side MPU 92, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S3801, and the processes of steps S3914 to S3916 are performed. A function to execute, a function of executing the processes of steps S4005 to S4009 and steps S4102 to S4107 in the staging side MPU 92 in the second embodiment, and a function of step S4205-step S4210 in the staging side MPU 92 in the third embodiment. A function to execute, a function to execute the processing of steps S4216 to S4220, a function to make an affirmative determination in step S4301, and in the fourth embodiment, the processing of steps S4605 to S4608 and steps S4618 to S4621 in the staging side MPU 92. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, since a predetermined production period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, it is possible to diversify the production as compared with the configuration in which only one-shot production is executed in one game unit. Will be. In this case, if a non-target game occurs in a situation where the predetermined effect period is set, the predetermined effect period may not be continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined production period from being continued even when a non-target game in which it is not preferable to continue the predetermined production period occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suitably generate a predetermined staging period.

Feature A2. When the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the non-target correspondence control means prevents the predetermined production period from being continued, and the non-target correspondence effect (in the first embodiment, the stop notification, The effect executing means is controlled so that the irregular effect is executed in the second embodiment, the stop notification and the irregular effect in the third embodiment, and the irregular effect in the fourth embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature A1.

According to the feature A2, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, not only the predetermined production period is not continued, but also the non-target corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined production period has not been continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature A3. When the non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined production period, the non-target correspondence control means has the content corresponding to the progress of the predetermined production period (second and third implementations). The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the effect executing means is controlled so that the effect during irregularity in the embodiment) is executed.

According to the feature A3, the effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is executed as the non-targeted effect. This makes it possible to associate the execution content of the non-targeted effect with the progress content of the predetermined effect period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the non-objective staging. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the execution of the non-target corresponding effect instead of the situation where the predetermined effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature A4. Correspondence-related information (irregular data table in the second embodiment) in which the content of the non-targeted response effect is predetermined in correspondence with the progress of the predetermined effect period is previously stored in the information storage means (production side ROM 93). Remembered,
When the non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined production period, the non-target correspondence control means specifies the content of the non-target correspondence effect corresponding to the progress status of the predetermined production period from the correspondence relationship information. , The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, characterized in that the effect executing means is controlled so that the non-target corresponding effect of the specified content is executed.

According to the feature A4, the correspondence-related information in which the content of the non-targeted production is predetermined in correspondence with the progress of the predetermined production period is stored in advance in the information storage means, and the non-target is not targeted in the situation of the predetermined production period. When a game occurs, the content of the non-targeted response effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is specified from the correspondence relationship information, and the non-targeted response effect of the specified content is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the non-targeted staging of the content corresponding to the progress of the predetermined staging period while reducing the processing load.

Feature A5. During the predetermined effect period, the effect execution means displays a moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect.
When the non-target game occurs in a situation where the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed, the non-target correspondence control means is a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect. (In the first to third embodiments, the image displayed on the image display device 63 when the stopped notification is executed) is displayed in the staging execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4.

According to the feature A5, when the non-target game occurs in the situation where the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed, the non-target using the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect. The corresponding image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the progress of the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is stopped by using the still image displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect, and the player is not targeted accordingly. It is possible to make the player aware that the game has occurred.

Feature A6. In the non-target correspondence control means, the image corresponding to the processed data of the data corresponding to the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is executed as the non-target correspondence image. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that it is displayed by means.

According to the feature A6, when the non-target game occurs in the situation where the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed, it corresponds to the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect. The data is processed and the image corresponding to the processed data is displayed as an asymmetric corresponding image. As a result, in the configuration in which the non-target compatible image is displayed using the still image displayed in the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect, the non-target compatible image is the still image itself displayed in the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the non-target compatible image is displayed.

Feature A7. When the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the non-target correspondence control means has a predetermined non-target correspondence effect (irregular in the fourth embodiment) that does not correspond to the progress of the predetermined production period. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the effect executing means is controlled so that the effect (medium effect) is executed.

According to the feature A7, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the predetermined non-target corresponding effect that does not correspond to the progress of the predetermined effect period is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the information required for executing the non-objective effect, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature A8. The predetermined effect control means is a case where the target game is not continuously executed due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined effect period, and the target game is generated. Post-end execution means for generating the predetermined effect period (a function of executing the processes of step S3709, step S3710, step S3918 and step S3919 in the effect side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and the effect side MPU 92 in the second embodiment. The function of executing the processing of step S4011 and step S4012, the function of executing the processing of step S4212, step S4213, step S4222 and step S4223 in the staging side MPU 92 in the third embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of step S4223 in the fourth embodiment in the staging side MPU 92. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S4610 to S4613).

According to the feature A8, even if the predetermined production period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined production period, the predetermined production period occurs when the target game occurs after that. .. As a result, even if a non-target game occurs in a situation where the predetermined production period is set, it is possible to prevent the predetermined production period from occurring as it is, and the opportunity for the predetermined production period to occur is secured. It becomes possible.

Feature A9. The post-end execution means is the case where the non-target game is generated in the situation of the predetermined effect period and the predetermined effect period is not continued, and when the target game is generated, the predetermined effect is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that the progress of the predetermined production period is restarted from the content of the timing that was stopped last time in the period.

According to the feature A9, even if the predetermined production period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined production period, if the target game occurs after that, the previous time in the predetermined production period The progress of the predetermined production period is restarted from the content of the stopped timing. As a result, even if a non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined production period, if the target game occurs after that, it is possible to have the player confirm the content of the continuation of the predetermined production period.

Feature A10. The post-end execution means is the case where the non-target game is generated in the situation of the predetermined effect period and the predetermined effect period is not continued, and when the target game is generated, the predetermined effect is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A8, which is characterized in that a period is newly started.

According to the feature A10, when the predetermined production period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined production period, the predetermined production period is newly generated by the subsequent generation of the target game. It will be started. As a result, when a non-target game occurs, it is possible to provide the player with a new predetermined production period triggered by the subsequent occurrence of the target game.

Feature A11. The non-target correspondence control means
When the first non-target game (a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "2") occurs as the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined production period, the predetermined production period is prevented from being continued. A means for controlling the effect executing means so that the first non-target corresponding effect (irregular medium effect) is executed (a function of executing the processes of steps S4216 to S4220 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment). ,
When a second non-target game (a game in the first CB state ST2 or a second CB state ST3) occurs as the non-target game in a situation during the predetermined production period, the predetermined production period is prevented from being continued and the second non-target game is not continued. Means for controlling the effect executing means so that the corresponding effect (notification during stop) is executed (a function of executing the processes of steps S4205 to S4207 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the feature A11, the predetermined production period is not continued regardless of whether the first non-target game occurs or the second non-target game occurs as the non-target game, while the first non-target game is not continued. The type of non-target corresponding effect to be executed differs depending on whether the game occurs or the second non-target game occurs. This makes it possible to execute the asymmetrical effect in a manner corresponding to the type of the asymmetrical game that has occurred.

Feature A12. The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically.
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the second non-target game is a game that occurs continuously.

According to the feature A12, it is possible to make the execution mode of the non-target correspondence effect different between the case where the non-target game occurs sporadically and the case where the non-target game occurs continuously.

Feature A13. During the predetermined effect period, the effect execution means displays a moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect.
In one of the first non-target compatible effect and the second non-target compatible effect, an image using a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means. It is a production to be done
The other of the first non-target compatible effect and the second non-target compatible effect is a feature A11 characterized in that an image that does not use the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means. Or the gaming machine according to A12.

According to the feature A13, depending on whether or not an image using a still image displayed in a moving image display corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed, the non-target compatible effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the type of the generated non-target game. It will be possible.

Feature A14. It is a configuration that enables the start of a game when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set as a bet.
The target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media among the predetermined numbers is set as a bet.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of gaming media is set as a bet. ..

According to the feature A14, the predetermined production period can be continued in the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, whereas in the game in which the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the predetermined effect period can be continued. The predetermined production period will not be continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet has occurred.

Feature A15. The feature A14 is characterized in that a game in which a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is more advantageous to a player than a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A15, in a configuration in which a game in which a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is more advantageous to the player than a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the first In a game in which a predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the predetermined effect period can be continued, whereas in a game in which a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the predetermined effect period is not continued. Become. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a second predetermined number of game media, which is relatively disadvantageous, is set as a bet has occurred.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature A16, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the game in which the bet is set with a relatively small number of game media has occurred.

Feature A17. The target game is a game executed in a game state that is not a predetermined game state (first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the non-target game is a game executed in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A17, the predetermined effect period can be continued in the game executed in the game state other than the predetermined gaming state, whereas the predetermined effect period is not continued in the game in the predetermined gaming state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in a predetermined gaming state has occurred.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A17, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined target game (a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3") is executed, a predetermined effect period (a base effect for an additional period in the third embodiment) is performed over a plurality of games. And the predetermined effect control means (step S3207 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) that controls the effect execution means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device 63) so that the base effect for the ending period is generated. (Functions for executing the processes of step S3208, step S3908, and step S3909) and
In the situation of the predetermined production period, the production content when a predetermined non-target game (a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or a second CB state ST3) occurs is the non-target. A non-target game that differs between the case where the first non-target game (game in which the number of bets is "2") occurs and the case where the second non-target game (game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs. Target correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4205 to S4210 of the effecting side MPU 92 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4216 to S4220, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S4301). ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, since a predetermined production period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, it is possible to diversify the production as compared with the configuration in which only one-shot production is executed in one game unit. Will be. In this case, the effect content when the non-target game occurs in the predetermined production period differs between the case where the first non-target game occurs as the non-target game and the case where the second non-target game occurs. obtain. As a result, when a non-target game occurs in a situation during a predetermined production period, the production content can be set to correspond to the non-target game, and the production content can be made to correspond to the type of the non-target game in which the non-target game has occurred. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the predetermined effect period.

Feature B2. The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second non-target game is a game that occurs continuously.

According to the feature B2, the production content when the non-target game occurs in the predetermined production period differs between the case where the non-target game occurs sporadically and the case where the non-target game occurs continuously. It will be. As a result, it is possible to make the production content appropriate for the one-off occurrence of the non-target game, and it is possible to make the production content appropriate for the continuous occurrence of the non-target game. It will be possible.

Feature B3. The non-target correspondence control means
When the first non-target game (a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "2") occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the first non-target corresponding effect (irregular medium effect) is executed. A means for controlling the effect executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4216 to S4220 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) and
When the second non-target game (game of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the second non-target corresponding effect (stop notification) is executed. A means for controlling the effect executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4205 to S4207 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B1 or B2.

According to the feature B3, the type of the non-target corresponding effect to be executed differs between the case where the first non-target game occurs and the case where the second non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period. This makes it possible to execute the asymmetrical effect in a manner corresponding to the type of the asymmetrical game that has occurred.

Feature B4. During the predetermined effect period, the effect execution means displays a moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect.
In one of the first non-target compatible effect and the second non-target compatible effect, an image using a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means. It is a production to be done
The other of the first non-target compatible effect and the second non-target compatible effect is a feature B3 characterized in that an image that does not use the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B4, depending on whether or not an image using a still image displayed in a moving image display corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed, the non-target compatible effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the type of the generated non-target game. It will be possible.

Feature B5. During the predetermined effect period, the effect execution means displays a moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect.
The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically.
The second non-target game is a game that occurs continuously, and is a game that occurs continuously.
The first non-targeting effect is an effect in which an image that does not use the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means.
The second non-target compatible effect is characterized in that an image using a still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 or B4.

According to the feature B5, the production content when the non-target game occurs in the predetermined production period differs between the case where the non-target game occurs sporadically and the case where the non-target game occurs continuously. It will be. As a result, it is possible to make the production content appropriate for the one-off occurrence of the non-target game, and it is possible to make the production content appropriate for the continuous occurrence of the non-target game. It will be possible.

In addition, when a non-target game occurs in a single shot, an image that does not use the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed, so that the display effect is significantly different from the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect. It is possible to generate the image.

Further, when the non-target game occurs continuously, an image using the still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs is displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect. As a result, even if the non-target game occurs continuously, the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect does not proceed, but the image using the still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs is displayed in the video display. In order to continue, it is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed.

Feature B6. At least one of the first non-target compatible effect and the second non-target compatible effect is characterized in that it is executed with the content corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period at the timing when the corresponding non-target game occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B3 to B5.

According to the feature B6, the effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is executed as the non-targeted effect. This makes it possible to associate the execution content of the non-targeted effect with the progress content of the predetermined effect period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the non-objective staging. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the execution of the non-target corresponding effect instead of the situation where the predetermined effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature B7. It is a configuration that enables the start of a game when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set as a bet.
The target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a game state other than the predetermined game state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3). ,
The first non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set as a bet in a game state other than the predetermined game state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the second non-target game is a game in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B7, the game in which the second predetermined number of game media are bet in the game state which is not the predetermined game state and the game in the predetermined game state are treated as non-target games, and the game in the game state which is not the predetermined game state is the first. 1 A game in which a predetermined number of game media are bet is treated as a target game. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a second predetermined number of game media are bet or a game in the predetermined game state has occurred in a game state other than the predetermined game state.

Feature B8. In a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set in a game state other than the predetermined game state, the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the game state not in the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is characterized by being more advantageous to the player than the game being played.

According to the feature B8, the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the game state other than the predetermined game state is bet set in the second predetermined number of game media in the game state in which the game state is not the predetermined game state. In a configuration that is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the game is played, a game in which a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets in a game state that is not in the predetermined game state is treated as a target game and is not in the predetermined game state. A game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet is treated as a non-target game. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a second predetermined number of game media, which is relatively disadvantageous, is set as a bet has occurred.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B7 or B8, wherein the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature B9, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the game in which the bet is set with a relatively small number of game media has occurred.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B9, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. The effect executing means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device) so that a predetermined effect period (base effect for the present precursor period and base effect for the false precursor period in the fourth embodiment) occurs over a plurality of games. A predetermined effect control means for controlling 63) (a function of executing the processes of step S4502, step S4503, step S4508, and step S4509 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment).
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation of the predetermined effect period (a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or a game in the second CB state ST3), the predetermined effect period being executed is interrupted. (A function to execute the processes of step S4605 and step S4618 of the staging side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment) and the intermediate termination means to be terminated in
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, since a predetermined production period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, it is possible to diversify the production as compared with the configuration in which only one-shot production is executed in one game unit. Will be. In this case, the predetermined effect period being executed is terminated in the middle based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation of the predetermined effect period. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined effect period from being continued until a predetermined condition for which it is not preferable to continue the predetermined effect period is satisfied. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect period is not temporarily stopped in the middle of the state, but the predetermined effect period is terminated in the middle. Therefore, after the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is released. Will start a new production. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand the effect content of the effect to be executed after the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is released.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined production period.

According to the feature C2, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period ends in the middle. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined effect period from being continued until a non-target game in which it is not preferable to continue the predetermined effect period occurs. In addition, when a non-target game occurs, the predetermined production period is not temporarily stopped in the middle of the predetermined production period, but the predetermined production period ends in the middle. Therefore, after the non-target game ends, the production is newly performed. It will be started. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect content of the effect executed after the non-target game ends easy for the player to understand.

Feature C3. The predetermined effect control means is a start control means (step S4611 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment) for newly starting the predetermined effect period based on the release of the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S4612).

According to the feature C3, when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation where the predetermined effect period is being executed and the predetermined effect period is terminated in the middle, or when the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled after that. A new predetermined production period will be started. As a result, when the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled, it becomes possible to provide the player with a new predetermined effect period.

Feature C4. When the start control means newly starts the predetermined effect period based on the cancellation of the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start control means newly starts the game over the remaining number of executed games in the predetermined effect period. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that a predetermined effect period to be started is performed.

According to the feature C4, when the predetermined effect period is newly started by releasing the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect period is newly started over the remaining number of executed games in the predetermined effect period. Since the predetermined effect period is executed, it is possible to prevent the period of the predetermined effect period from becoming excessively long.

Feature C5. The start control means is
Content determining means for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect period corresponding to the number of remaining executed games in the predetermined effect period when the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled (the effect side in the fourth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S4611 of MPU92) and
A means for generating the predetermined effect period according to the effect content determined by the content determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4612 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to the feature C3 or C4, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C3 or C4.

According to the feature C5, when the predetermined effect period is newly started by releasing the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect period is newly started over the remaining number of executed games in the predetermined effect period. Since the predetermined effect period is executed, it is possible to prevent the period of the predetermined effect period from becoming excessively long. In addition, since the newly started predetermined effect period has the effect content corresponding to the remaining number of executed games in the predetermined effect period, the effect content of the newly started predetermined effect period is the number of remaining executed games. It is possible to make the production content suitable for.

Feature C6. The predetermined effect control means is
With initial determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4502 of the production side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment) to determine the production content of the predetermined production period corresponding to the number of initial games based on the occurrence of the production start opportunity. ,
A means for generating the predetermined effect period according to the effect content determined by the initial determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4503 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to the feature C4 or C5, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C4 or C5.

According to the feature C6, the production content of the predetermined production period corresponding to the initial number of games is determined based on the occurrence of the production start opportunity, and the predetermined production period according to the determined production content is executed. As a result, it is possible to change the production content of the predetermined production period, which is started based on the occurrence of the production start opportunity, to the production content corresponding to the initial number of games. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation where the predetermined effect period is being executed, the predetermined effect period is terminated in the middle, and if the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled, the predetermined condition is satisfied. The newly started predetermined production period is executed over the number of execution games remaining in the production period. This makes it possible to keep the total number of games in the predetermined production period executed with the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions within the range of the initial number of games.

Feature C7. It is a configuration in which the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined non-target game occurs in a situation where the predetermined production period is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the number of executed games remaining in the predetermined effect period is not reduced even if the non-target game is executed.

According to the feature C7, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the predetermined production period ends in the middle, and when the non-target game ends, the predetermined production period is newly started. In the configuration, even if the non-target game is executed, the number of executed games remaining in the predetermined production period does not decrease, so that the total number of games in the predetermined production period does not decrease due to the occurrence of the non-target game. It will be possible.

Feature C8. As the predetermined effect period, there are a first predetermined effect period (base effect for the present precursor period in the fourth embodiment) and a second predetermined effect period (base effect for the false precursor period in the fourth embodiment). And
When the first predetermined effect period being executed ends in the middle based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation of the first predetermined effect period, the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled. The first predetermined production period is generated based on the above.
If the second predetermined effect period that is being executed ends in the middle of the situation based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation of the second predetermined effect period, it is assumed that the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7, which is characterized in that the second predetermined effect period does not occur.

According to the feature C8, even if the first predetermined effect period is terminated based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first predetermined effect period is generated based on the fact that the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled. On the other hand, when the second predetermined effect period is terminated based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second predetermined effect period does not occur even if the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled. This makes it possible to change the execution mode of the effect after the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled according to the type of the predetermined effect period.

Feature C9. The first predetermined effect period is an effect executed when a profit (additional period) is subsequently given to the player.
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the second predetermined effect period is an effect executed when the profit is not given to the player thereafter.

According to the feature C9, the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the first predetermined effect period in which the player is subsequently given a profit. It is executed by being done. This makes it possible to suitably increase the expectation that the profit will be given. On the other hand, regarding the second predetermined effect period, which is executed when the player is not given a profit after that, if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the period and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is released. Even if it does not run. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given no profit in the end even though the second predetermined effect period is executed again.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C9, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined target game (a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3") is executed, a specific effect period (base effect for the ending period) is generated over a plurality of games. Specific effect control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3908 and S3909 in the effect side MPU 92) for controlling the effect execution means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device 63), and
The specific effect is the effect content when a predetermined non-target game (a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or a game in the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation during the specific effect period. When the first specific effect period (base effect for the ending period triggered by the setting of "1" in the first ending flag of the effect side in the effect side RAM 94) occurs as the period, and the second specific effect. Specific response control means (directing side) that differs from the case where a period (base production for the ending period triggered by the setting of "1" in the second ending flag of the directing side in the staging side RAM 94) occurs. (Function to execute the process of step S3911 to step S3916 in MPU92) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, since a specific production period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, it is possible to diversify the production as compared with the configuration in which only one-shot production is executed in one game unit. Will be. In this case, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the specific effect period, the effect content is the case where the first specific effect period occurs as the specific effect period and the case where the second specific effect period occurs. Can be different. As a result, it is possible to make the effect content when the non-target game occurs correspond to the type of the specific effect period in which the effect is generated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably generate a specific staging period.

Feature D2. Even if the non-target game occurs in the situation of the first specific effect period, the first specific effect period is continued.
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific response control means prevents the second specific effect period from being continued when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the second specific effect period. ..

According to the feature D2, depending on the type of the specific effect period that is occurring, the specific effect period is continued as it is when the non-target game occurs, and the specific effect period is continued when the non-target game occurs. It is possible to create a situation that is not executed.

Feature D3. The specific effect control means is
Means for generating the first specific effect period based on the occurrence of the first specific start trigger (“1” is set in the first ending flag of the effect side in the effect side RAM 94) (effect in the effect side MPU 92). A function to execute the processes of steps S3908 and S3909 when "1" is set in the first ending flag on the side) and
Means for generating the second specific effect period based on the occurrence of the second specific start trigger (“1” is set in the second ending flag of the effect side in the effect side RAM 94) (effect in the effect side MPU 92). A function to execute the processing of step S3908 and step S3909 when "1" is set in the second ending flag on the side) and
Equipped with
In the specific response control means, the first specific start trigger occurs when the second specific effect period is prevented from being continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the second specific effect period. In this case, the gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second specific effect period is continued even in a situation where the non-target game is occurring.

According to the feature D3, even if the second specific effect period is prevented from being continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the second specific effect period, the first specific start opportunity occurs. In that case, the second specific effect period is continued even in the situation where the non-target game is occurring. As a result, even in the situation of the second specific effect period, when the first specific start opportunity occurs, the handling of the non-target game can be made the same as the situation of the first specific effect period.

Feature D4. It is provided with an advantageous end means (a function of executing the process of step S1914 in the main MPU 72) to end the advantageous game situation based on the establishment of the advantageous end condition in the advantageous game situation (second section SC2).
One of the features D1 to D3, wherein the specific effect control means starts the specific effect period based on the pre-end situation (ending period) before the advantageous end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to generate a specific effect period in the pre-end situation before the advantageous end condition is satisfied. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature D1, it is possible to make the effect content when the non-target game occurs correspond to the type of the specific effect period in which the non-target game is generated. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect in the pre-end situation suitable.

Feature D5. The advantageous end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous game situation reaches the upper limit number of games.
From the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous game situation continues, the total number of game media digested to execute the game when the advantageous game situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting is used as the predetermined difference number (total net increase in the number of limited game media), the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is calculated. Based on the fact that the upper limit difference is reached, the above-mentioned advantageous termination condition is satisfied, and
As the pre-end situation, the first pre-end situation (a situation in which "1" is set in the first ending flag in the main RAM 74) that occurs before the establishment of the advantageous end condition by reaching the upper limit number of games. ) And the second pre-end situation (a situation in which "1" is set in the second ending flag in the main RAM 74) that occurs before the establishment of the advantageous end condition by reaching the upper limit difference number. Exists and
The specific effect control means starts the first specific effect period based on the situation before the first end, and sets the second specific effect period based on the situation before the end of the second end. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that it is started.

According to the feature D5, the advantageous game situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous game situation reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous game situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible. In addition, since the advantageous gaming situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous gaming situation reaches the upper limit difference number, the advantageous gaming situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to. In this case, the first specific effect period is started based on the situation before the end of the first period, the second specific effect period is started based on the situation before the end of the second period, and the first The content of the effect when the non-target game is executed differs between the specific effect period and the second specific effect period. As a result, it is possible to make the content of the effect when the non-target game occurs correspond to the content of the opportunity that is the situation before the end.

Feature D6. When the non-target game occurs in the advantageous gaming situation, the non-target game is also configured to be counted in the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming situation, and the predetermined difference number is reduced.
Even if the non-target game occurs in the situation of the first specific effect period, the first specific effect period is continued.
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the specific response control means prevents the second specific effect period from being continued when the non-target game occurs in a situation during the second specific effect period. ..

According to the feature D6, when a non-target game occurs in an advantageous gaming situation, the non-target game is also counted in the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming situation, and the predetermined difference is reduced. As a result, when a non-target game occurs, it is possible to approach the upper limit number of games while moving away from the upper limit difference number. In this case, in the case of the first specific production period that occurs due to the situation before the first end, which is before the maximum number of games is reached, even if a non-target game occurs, the first specific production period is Will be continued. As a result, when the end of the advantageous gaming situation is approached due to the occurrence of the non-target game, it is possible to advance the specific staging period accordingly. On the other hand, in the case of the second specific production period that occurs due to the situation before the second end, which is before reaching the upper limit difference number, the second specific production period is for the occurrence of the non-target game. It will not be continued. As a result, it is possible to stop the progress of the specific effect period when the game moves away from the end of the advantageous gaming situation due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature D7. When the non-target game occurs in the situation of the second specific effect period, the specific response control means prevents the second specific effect period from being continued, and the non-target response effect (stop in the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D6, characterized in that the effect executing means is controlled so that the middle notification) is executed.

According to the feature D7, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the specific effect period, not only the specific effect period is not continued, but also the non-target corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the specific production period has not been continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature D8. When the non-target game occurs in the situation during the second specific effect period, the specific response control means has the content corresponding to the progress of the second specific effect period (first implementation). The gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized in that the effect executing means is controlled so that the stopped notification in the embodiment) is executed.

According to the feature D8, as the non-targeted effect, the effect of the content corresponding to the progress of the second specific effect period is executed. This makes it possible to associate the execution content of the non-targeted effect with the progress content of the second specific effect period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the non-objective staging. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the execution of the non-target corresponding effect instead of the situation where the second specific effect period is not continuously executed due to the occurrence of the non-target game. Become.

Feature D9. As the second specific effect period, the effect execution means is configured to display a moving image corresponding to the second specific effect.
When the non-target game occurs in a situation where the video display corresponding to the second specific effect is performed, the specific response control means timings when the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect. An non-target compatible image (an image displayed on the image display device 63 when the stopped notification in the first embodiment is executed) using the still image in the above is displayed by the staging execution means as the non-target compatible effect. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, characterized in that it is to be performed.

According to the feature D9, when the non-target game occurs in the situation where the video display corresponding to the second specific effect is performed, the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect is displayed. The non-target compatible image used is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the progress of the video display corresponding to the second specific effect has been stopped by using the still image displayed in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect. Along with this, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the non-target game has occurred.

Feature D10. In the specific correspondence control means, the image corresponding to the processed data of the data corresponding to the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect is the effect as the non-target correspondence image. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that it is displayed in an executing means.

According to the feature D10, when the non-target game occurs in the situation where the video display corresponding to the second specific effect is performed, the non-target game is stationary at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect. The data corresponding to the image is processed, and the image corresponding to the processed data is displayed as the non-target compatible image. As a result, in the configuration in which the non-target compatible image is displayed using the still image displayed in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect, the non-target compatible image is displayed in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect. Since it is not the still image itself, it is easy for the player to recognize that the non-target compatible image is displayed.

Feature D11. The specific effect control means is a case where the second specific effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the second specific effect period, and the target game occurs. The post-end execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3918 and S3919 in the effecting side MPU 92) for restarting the progress of the second specific effect period from the content of the timing previously stopped in the second specific effect period is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3, D6 to D10.

According to the feature D11, even if the second specific effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the second specific effect period, if the target game occurs after that, the first 2 The progress of the second specific effect period is restarted from the content of the timing that was stopped last time in the specific effect period. As a result, even if a non-target game occurs in the situation of the second specific production period, if the target game occurs after that, it is possible to have the player confirm the content of the continuation of the second specific production period. Become.

Feature D12. It is a configuration that enables the start of a game when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set as a bet.
The target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media among the predetermined numbers is set as a bet.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of gaming media is set as a bet. ..

According to the feature D12, the execution mode of the effect can be changed in the game in which the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet has occurred.

Feature D13. The feature D12 is characterized in that a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is more advantageous to the player than a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature D13, in a configuration in which a game in which a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet is more advantageous to the player than a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the second In a game in which a predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the execution mode of the effect may change. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a second predetermined number of game media, which is relatively disadvantageous, is set as a bet has occurred.

Feature D14. The gaming machine according to feature D12 or D13, wherein the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature D14, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the game in which the bet is set with a relatively small number of game media has occurred.

Feature D15. The target game is a game executed in a game state that is not a predetermined game state (first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3).
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, wherein the non-target game is a game executed in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature D15, when a game in a predetermined gaming state occurs, the execution mode of the effect may change. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in a predetermined gaming state has occurred.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D15, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A predetermined storage means (production side ROM 93) that stores a plurality of production control data tables (AT data table group 101, additional period data table group 102) in advance, and
Specific storage means (RAM 94 on the effect side) from which the effect control data table is read, and
A staging control means (a function of executing task processing (FIG. 60) on the staging side MPU 92) that controls the execution of the staging according to the staging control data table read out by the specific storage means.
Equipped with
The effect control data table is a combination of a plurality of reference information (pointer information) and control information (combination of image data, audio data, and light emission data) that are set corresponding to each reference information and that define the content of effect execution control. ) And has,
The staging control means
An update means (step S3301 in the effect side MPU 92) for updating the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read out to the specific storage means to the reference information in the next order when an update trigger occurs. -Function to execute the process of step S3315) and
A control execution means (effect side MPU 92) that controls the execution of an effect by using the control information corresponding to the reference information that is the reference target in the effect control data table read out by the specific storage means. (Function to execute the process of step S3316 to step S3320) in
Equipped with
The staging control means is used for a predetermined state (additional period to the second control area 112) even when the staging control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area (first control area 111) of the specific storage means. When the data table is being read), the configuration is such that the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table is not performed.
The update means in the effect control data table when the update trigger occurs even in the predetermined state when the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined updating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3308 to S3310 in the staging side MPU 92) for updating the reference information to be referred to to the reference information in the next order.

According to the feature E1, the execution control of the effect is performed by using the effect control data table having a plurality of reference information and the control information set corresponding to each reference information. Can be performed according to a predetermined control pattern.

In this case, even if the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area, if the predetermined state is reached, the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table is not performed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table is not performed even when the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area.

On the other hand, even in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is not performed due to the predetermined state, the reference to be referred to in the effect control data table. Information updates will continue. As a result, when the predetermined state ends, it is possible to restart the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area from the content that has advanced for a period longer than the duration of the predetermined state. It becomes.

Feature E2. The effect control means is said to be in the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means from the situation where the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means and is in the predetermined state. When the effect control data table is being read and not in the predetermined state, it becomes a reference target in the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the execution control of the effect is performed by using the control information corresponding to the reference information.

According to the feature E2, even in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is not performed due to the predetermined state, the reference target in the effect control data table. The update of the reference information becomes continued. Then, when the situation is not the predetermined state in the situation, the control information corresponding to the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is used for the effect. Execution control is performed. As a result, when the predetermined state ends, it is possible to restart the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area from the contents advanced by the period in which the predetermined state continues. It becomes.

Feature E3. The updating means is the reference information in the last order in the effect control data table in a situation where the effect control data table is read into the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means and not in the predetermined state. When the update trigger occurs in the situation where is the reference target, a new lap of updating the reference information to be the reference target is started with the reference information in the first order in the effect control data table as the reference target. To make you
The predetermined update means is a reference target in the effect control data table in a situation where the effect control data table is read into the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means and is in the predetermined state. Based on the fact that the information becomes the reference information in the last order in the effect control data table, even if the update trigger occurs after that in the situation of the predetermined state, the reference information to be referred to is updated. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the update stop state (a state in which "1" is set in the update standby flag of the effect side RAM 94) is set so as not to start a new lap.

According to the feature E3, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is updated in the situation where the effect execution control is not performed according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area. However, if the reference information to be referred to becomes the reference information in the last order, a new round of updating the reference information to be referred to is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area from being continuously updated in a situation where the predetermined state continues for a long time.

Feature E4. When the update means is in the update stop state and is no longer in the predetermined state, the update means refers to the reference information in the first order in the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area, and the reference information is the reference information. The gaming machine according to feature E3, which is characterized by starting a new lap of the update of.

According to the feature E4, when the update cycle of the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table of the predetermined storage area when the predetermined state is started ends in the middle of the predetermined state, the predetermined state is subsequently changed. When it is completed, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table of the predetermined storage area is started to be updated from the reference information in the first order. As a result, even if the execution content of the effect started when the predetermined state ends does not correspond to the execution content of the effect before the start of the predetermined state in chronological order, the effect is produced from the first execution timing. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that it has started, and it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature E5. The specific storage means includes the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area (second control area 112) as storage areas for which the staging control data table is individually read out.
The predetermined state is a state in which the effect control data table is read out in each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area.
When the effect control data table is read out in each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area, the effect control means executes the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the specific storage area. The configuration is such that control is performed, but execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is not performed.
The predetermined update means is read into the predetermined storage area when the effect control data table is read out in each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area, and when the update trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is updated to the reference information in the following order.

According to the feature E5, as a storage area in which the effect control data table is individually read out, not only a predetermined storage area but also a specific storage area is provided, so that a state in which a plurality of effect control data tables are read out at the same time can be obtained. It is possible to make it happen.

Further, when the effect control data table is read out in each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the effect control data table read out in the specific storage area, while the predetermined storage area. The execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in is not performed. As a result, it becomes possible to set a specific storage area as a storage area having priority over a predetermined storage area as a storage area to be executed by the effect execution control, and a state in which a plurality of effect control data tables are read out at the same time can be obtained. It is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the side that should be prioritized as the execution target of the execution control of the staging in the configuration that can be generated.

In this case, even if the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is not performed, the update of the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is continued. Will be done. As a result, when the effect control data table is not read out in the specific storage area, the process advances beyond the period during which the effect execution control is performed according to the effect control data table read out in the specific storage area. From the contents, it is possible to restart the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area.

Feature E6. The effect control means has read the effect control data table into the predetermined storage area from the situation where the effect control data table is read out in each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area, and the specific effect control means has the effect control data table read out into the predetermined storage area. When the effect control data table is not read out in the storage area, the control corresponding to the reference information referred to in the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature E5, which is characterized in that the execution control of an effect is performed by using the information.

According to the feature E6, even in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is not performed, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is updated. Will continue. Then, in the situation where the effect control data table is not read out in the specific storage area in the relevant situation, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is used. The execution control of the effect is performed using the corresponding control information. As a result, when the effect control data table is not read out in the specific storage area, the effect execution control is advanced according to the effect control data table read out in the specific storage area. From the contents, it is possible to restart the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area.

Feature E7. The update means is the last in the effect control data table in a situation where the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area and the effect control data table is not read out in the specific storage area. When the update trigger occurs in a situation where the reference information in the order of is the reference target, the reference information to be the reference target is updated with the reference information in the first order in the effect control data table as the reference target. It is to start a new lap of
The predetermined update means reads into the predetermined storage area in a situation where the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area and the effect control data table is read out in the specific storage area. Even if the update trigger occurs thereafter based on the fact that the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table that has been issued becomes the reference information in the last order in the effect control data table. An update stop state in which a new lap of updating the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read into the predetermined storage area is not started (“1” is set in the update standby flag of the effect side RAM 94. The gaming machine according to the feature E5 or E6, which is characterized in that it is in a state of being).

According to the feature E7, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is continuously updated in the situation where the effect execution control according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area is not performed. However, when the reference information to be referred to becomes the reference information in the last order, a new round of updating the reference information to be referred to is not started. As a result, in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out to the specific storage area continues for a long time, the reference to be the reference target of the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area. It is possible to prevent the information from being continuously updated.

Feature E8. When the update means is in the update stop state and the effect control data table is not read out in the specific storage area, the effect control data table is read out in the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized in that a new lap of updating the reference information is started with the reference information in the first order in the above as a reference target.

According to the feature E8, the update cycle of the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table of the predetermined storage area at the timing when the effect control data table is read out in the specific storage area is in the effect control data table of the specific storage area. If the operation is terminated in the middle of the execution control of the corresponding effect, and if the effect control data table is not read out to the specific storage area after that, the reference information in the first order is used as the reference information for the predetermined storage area. The update of the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is started. As a result, the execution content of the effect started when the effect control data table is not read in the specific storage area is the execution content of the effect before the effect control data table is read out in the specific storage area. Even if it does not correspond in chronological order, it is possible to make the player recognize that the production is started from the first execution timing, and it is difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E8, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the features of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to preferably perform the staging, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Advantageous transition means for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player (a function of executing the processes of steps S2906 and S2907 in the main MPU 72) and
Means for ending the advantageous gaming state (step in the main MPU 72) when the remaining continuation reference number (the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5) becomes "0" in the advantageous gaming state as the game is executed. (Function to execute the process of S3111 to step S3119) and
In the game to be granted (the game in which the loop lottery is generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014)), the lottery end opportunity (additional lottery processing (step S3411) does not result in additional winning, and the additional lottery processing (additional lottery processing) Every time the lottery execution trigger occurs (every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated) until the number of executions of step S3411) reaches the end reference number), the remaining continuation reference number is increased. An increase lottery means (step in the main MPU 72) that executes an increase lottery process (step S3411), which is at least one of a lottery process for determining whether or not to cause the game and a lottery process for determining a value for increasing the remaining remaining reference number. Function to execute the processing of S3411) and
It is executed until the notification trigger occurs based on the notification trigger (stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R) in the situation where the lottery end trigger has not occurred in the grant target game. A predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3606 to S3608 in the staging side MPU 92) for notifying the increase in the remaining continuation reference number based on the result of the increase lottery process.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, in the case of the game to be granted, the increase lottery process is executed every time the lottery execution opportunity occurs until the lottery end opportunity occurs. In the increase lottery process, at least one of a value for increasing the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state and a value for increasing the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state is determined. As a result, the player expects to be a grant target game, and is expected to be granted a larger continuation reference number in the grant target game.

In addition, even if the lottery end trigger does not occur in the game to be granted, if the notification trigger occurs, the increase in the number of continuation reference numbers due to the increase lottery process executed until the notification trigger occurs is notified. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities to notify that the continuation standard number has been given within the range of the game to be given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein a plurality of types of the notification triggers exist in the game to be granted.

According to the feature F2, since there are a plurality of types of notification triggers in the grant target game, it is possible to increase the chances of being notified that the continuation reference number has been granted within the range of the grant target game.

Feature F3. The predetermined notification means is based on the increase lottery process executed from the start of the grant target game to the occurrence of the first notification trigger when the first notification trigger occurs in the grant target game. When the increase in the remaining continuation reference number is notified and the notification trigger is generated for the second time or later in the grant target game, the notification trigger is executed from the previous occurrence to the current occurrence of the notification trigger. The gaming machine according to feature F2, characterized in that an increase in the number of remaining continuation reference numbers based on the increase lottery process is notified.

According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which the notification trigger can occur multiple times in the grant target game, the increase in the number of continuation reference numbers notified in each notification trigger is the increase in the continuation reference number notified in the other notification triggers. It is possible to prevent duplication.

Features F4. A determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3014 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not to make the game a grant target game when the game is started, and
A function of executing the process of step S3016 in the main MPU 72 to assign the number corresponding to the determination time (10 games) to the remaining continuation reference number when the determination means determines that the game is to be granted. )When,
When the determination means determines that the game is to be granted, the means for notifying that the corresponding number at the time of determination has been assigned (a function of executing the processes of steps S3602 to S3604 in the effect side MPU 92). ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3.

According to the feature F4, when it is decided that the game to be granted occurs, the number of correspondences at the time of determination is given to the remaining reference number of continuation of the advantageous gaming state, and the number of correspondences at the time of the given decision is notified. To. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating the grant target game, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the grant target game.

Feature F5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas for variable display of a pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game starting means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the starting operating means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of the variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas.
When the game is executed, the variation display of the pattern is started, and based on the operation of the stop operation means, the variation display of the pattern in the variation display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means, and
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern is controlled by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S310 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
Equipped with
Any of the features F1 to F4 characterized in that the notification trigger is generated every time the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature F5, in the grant target game, each time the player operates the stop operation means, the increase in the number of continuation reference numbers based on the increase lottery process executed so far is notified. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to operating the stop operation means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the lottery end trigger occurs within the range of one game.

According to the feature F6, since the lottery end trigger occurs within the range of one game, it is possible to prevent the profit from being excessively given.

Feature F7. It is equipped with a specific processing execution means (a function to execute timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 72) that executes specific processing (timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)) each time a specific period elapses.
The specific period is set so that the specific process is executed a large number of times in the grant target game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the increase lottery process is executed in the specific process.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to enable the increase lottery process to be executed a large number of times in the grant target game.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F7, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas for variable display of a pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game starting means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the starting operating means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of the variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas.
When the game is executed, the variation display of the pattern is started, and based on the operation of the stop operation means, the variation display of the pattern in the variation display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means, and
If the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern is controlled by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S310 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
Equipped with
The pattern display control means is operated by the stop operation means in the first stop mode (middle → left → right) when the result of the lottery process of the combination is a predetermined correspondence result (winning with an index value IV = 16). It is possible to display the first stop result (stop result including the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) based on the fact that the winning combination is drawn. When the result is the predetermined correspondence result, the second stop result (“red 7” symbol, “red 7”” is based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the second stop mode (middle → right → left). It is possible to display the stop result) including the combination of the symbol and the "BAR" symbol.
As a gaming state advantageous to the player, a first advantageous gaming state (big bonus) and a second advantageous gaming state (regular bonus) are set.
This gaming machine is
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined response result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. The first predetermined notification (display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R) is executed so that the player can recognize it. The first predetermined notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2514 and S2515 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2605 in the staging side MPU 92), and
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined response result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop mode. The second predetermined notification (display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L) is executed so that the player can recognize it. A second predetermined notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2516 and S2517 in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the staging side MPU 92), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a predetermined correspondence result in the situation where it is decided to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. The first predetermined notification that makes the player recognizable is executed, and the stop operation is performed according to the first predetermined notification, so that the first stop result is displayed. In addition, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a predetermined response result in the situation where it is decided to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, the player is informed that the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop mode. The second predetermined notification to be recognizable is executed, and the stop operation is performed according to the second predetermined notification, so that the second stop result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display a stop result indicating the type of advantageous gaming state that occurs thereafter by utilizing the situation in which the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined correspondence result. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a transition to an advantageous gaming state may occur in a game in which the lottery process of the winning combination or the winning result is arbitrary, a predetermined stop result can be displayed at the transition to the advantageous gaming state. At the same time, it is possible to suggest the type of advantageous gaming state by the predetermined stop result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein a plurality of types of predetermined correspondence results exist.

According to the feature G2, since there are a plurality of types of predetermined response results, there are many opportunities for the predetermined stop result to be displayed at the time of transition to the advantageous gaming state and for suggesting the type of the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible.

Feature G3. In the winning response control means, regardless of whether the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined response result and the stop result is the first stop result or the second stop result. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, which is characterized in that a predetermined profit (profit of re-gaming) is given to a player.

According to the feature G3, the predetermined profit is given to the player regardless of whether the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined correspondence result and the stop result of the variation display of the pattern is either the first stop result or the second stop result. .. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while not affecting the profit given to the player.

Features G4. The pattern display control means has a third stop result (3rd stop result) based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the first stop mode when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a specific correspondence result (off result). The stop result including the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol) can be displayed, and when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific correspondence result, the above-mentioned The fourth stop result (a stop result including a combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol) is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in the second stop mode. Make it possible,
The first stop result and the fourth stop result are stop results in which a combination of predetermined symbols (a combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol) is stopped and displayed.
The second stop result and the third stop result are stop results in which the combination of specific symbols (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed.
In the situation where it is determined to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, the first predetermined notification control means executes the first predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is the specific correspondence result. To be done
The second predetermined notification control means executes the second predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific correspondence result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

According to the feature G4, the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs not only when the result of the lottery processing of the winning combination is the predetermined response result but also when the result is the specific response result, and the type of the advantageous gaming state. Can be suggested by the stop result after the variable display of the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities for suggestions based on the suspension result. In this case, the relationship between the content of the predetermined notification and the type of the advantageous gaming state to be suggested has the opposite relationship between the case where the lottery process of the winning combination results in the predetermined response result and the case where the specific response result is obtained. ing. As a result, regardless of whether the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification occurs, it is possible to make the player expect that the advantageous gaming state of the kind expected by the player will occur.

Feature G5. The first advantageous gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state.
The second predetermined notification control means executes the second predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined correspondence result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. (A function to make an affirmative judgment in step S2512 in the main MPU 72) is provided.
When the second predetermined notification is executed when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined corresponding result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. It is characterized by having a special notification execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the main MPU 72) so that the special notification (reel effect) is executed after the stop result of the game is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G4.

According to the feature G5, in the game in which it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, the second stop result is stopped and displayed as the stop result when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined lottery result. The special notification may be executed after that, while suggesting that the game shifts to the second advantageous gaming state on the side where the advantage is low. As a result, even if the second stop result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to expect the player to generate a special notification suggesting that the first advantageous gaming state is entered.

Feature G6. The special notification executing means executes the second predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the predetermined correspondence result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, as the special notification, when the next game is started for the game, the special notification result in which the first stop result is displayed after the variation display of the pattern is started is temporarily displayed, and then the special notification result is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized in that the variable display of the pattern is restarted.

According to the feature G6, since the variable display of the pattern is used even when the special notification is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the variable display of the pattern.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G6, any one of the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D15, the features E1 to E8, the features F1 to F7, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the features of the feature F group and the feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing a game ball given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game ball stored in the dish storage section is guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration including an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the game balls surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: A player starts the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the starting operation means, stops the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and responds to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 61 ... Upper lamp, 62 ... Speaker, 63 ... Image display device, 72 ... Main MPU , 92 ... Production side MPU, 93 ... Production side ROM, 94 ... Production side RAM, 101 ... AT data table group, 102 ... Additional period data table group, 111 ... First control area, 112 ... Second control area, SC2 ... 2nd section, ST2 ... 1st CB state, ST3 ... 2nd CB state, ST5 ... AT state.

Claims (1)

A predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect period occurs over a plurality of games when a target game , which is a game in which a predetermined number of game values are set, is executed.
In the situation of the predetermined production period, the production content when a non-target game , which is a game in which a game value smaller than the predetermined number is set as a bet, occurs, is the first non-target game as the non-target game. A non-target correspondence control means that makes a difference between the case where the second non-target game occurs and the case where the second non-target game occurs,
Equipped with
The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically.
The second non-target game is a game that occurs continuously, and is a game that occurs continuously.
The non-target correspondence control means
When the first non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined production period, a means for controlling the effect execution means so that the first non-target corresponding effect is executed, and a means for controlling the effect execution means.
When the second non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined production period, the means for controlling the effect execution means so that the second non-target corresponding effect is executed, and the means for controlling the effect execution means.
Equipped with
During the predetermined effect period, the effect execution means displays a moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect.
The first non-targeting effect is an effect in which an image that does not use the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means.
The second non-target compatible effect is characterized in that an image using a still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed in the effect executing means. A game machine to play.

Images